Manual Vauxhall Insignia 2019 (page 312 of 313) (English)

795526

312

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/313

Introduction .................................... 2

In brief ............................................ 6

Keys, doors and windows ............ 20

Seats, restraints ........................... 45

Storage ........................................ 73

Instruments and controls ............. 87

Lighting ...................................... 128

Climate control ........................... 139

Driving and operating ................. 150

Vehicle care ............................... 228

Service and maintenance .......... 276

Technical data ........................... 279

Customer information ................ 295

Index .......................................... 306

Contents

2 Introduction

Introduction

Introduction 3

Vehicle specific data

Please enter your vehicle's data on

the previous page to keep it easily

accessible.

Refer to the sections "Service and

maintenance", "Technical data", the

vehicle's identification plate and

national registration documents.

Introduction

Your vehicle is a designed

combination of advanced technology,

safety, environmental friendliness

and economy.

This Owner's Manual provides you

with all the necessary information to

enable you to drive your vehicle

safely and efficiently.

Make sure your passengers are

aware of the possible risk of accident

and injury which may result from

improper use of the vehicle.

You must always comply with the

specific laws and regulations of the

country that you are in. These laws

may differ from the information in this

Owner's Manual.

Disregarding the description given in

this manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to a

workshop visit, we recommend your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. For

gas vehicles, we recommend a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer

licensed to service gas vehicles.

All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers

provide first-class service at

reasonable prices. Experienced

mechanics trained by Vauxhall work

according to specific Vauxhall

instructions.

The customer literature pack should

always be kept ready to hand in the

vehicle.

Using this manual

● This manual describes all options

and features available for this

model. Certain descriptions,

including those for display and

menu functions, may not apply to

your vehicle due to model

variant, country specifications,

special equipment or

accessories.

● The "In brief" section will give you

an initial overview.

● The table of contents at the

beginning of this manual and

within each section shows where

the information is located.

● The index will enable you to

search for specific information.

● This Owner's Manual depicts left-

hand drive vehicles. Operation is

similar for right-hand drive

vehicles.

● The Owner's Manual uses the

engine identifier code. The

corresponding sales designation

and engineering code can be

found in the section "Technical

data".

● Directional data, e.g. left or right,

or front or back, always relate to

the direction of travel.

● Displays may not support your

specific language.

● Display messages and interior

labelling are written in bold

letters.

4 Introduction

Danger, Warnings and

Cautions

9Danger

Text marked 9 Danger provides

information on risk of fatal injury.

Disregarding this information may

endanger life.

9Warning

Text marked 9 Warning provides

information on risk of accident or

injury. Disregarding this

information may lead to injury.

Caution

Text marked Caution provides

information on possible damage to

the vehicle. Disregarding this

information may lead to vehicle

damage.

Symbols

Page references are indicated with 3.

3 means "see page".

Chronological order to select menu

entries in the vehicle personalisation

is indicated with I.

Page references and index entries

refer to the indented headings given

in the section table of content.

Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall.

We wish you many hours of

pleasurable driving.

Your Vauxhall Team

Introduction 5

6 In brief

In brief

Initial drive information

Vehicle unlocking

Press c to unlock the doors and load

compartment. Open the doors by

pulling the handles. To open the

tailgate, push the brand emblem and

open the tailgate.

Electronic key system 3 22.

Central locking system 3 25.

Load compartment 3 29.

Seat adjustment

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, release

handle. Try to move the seat back and

forth to ensure that the seat is locked

in place.

Seat position 3 47.

Manual seat adjustment 3 48.

Power seat adjustment 3 50.

In brief 7

Backrest inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean on

backrest when adjusting.

Seat position 3 47.

Manual seat adjustment 3 48.

Power seat adjustment 3 50.

Seat height

Lever pumping motion

up : seat higher

down : seat lower

Seat position 3 47.

Manual seat adjustment 3 48.

Power seat adjustment 3 50.

Seat inclination

Press switch

top : front end higher

bottom : front end lower

Seat position 3 47.

Manual seat adjustment 3 48.

Power seat adjustment 3 50.

8 In brief

Head restraint adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,

engage.

Head restraints 3 45.

Seat belt

Pull out the seat belt and fasten in belt

buckle. The seat belt must not be

twisted and must fit close against the

body. The backrest must not be tilted

back too far (maximum approx. 25°).

To unfasten belt, press red button on

belt buckle.

Seat position 3 47.

Seat belts 3 56.

Airbag system 3 58.

Mirror adjustment

Interior mirror

To adjust the mirror, move the mirror

housing in the desired direction.

Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror

3 39.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror

3 40.

In brief 9

Exterior mirrors

Select the relevant exterior mirror by

pushing left or right mirror button.

LED in button indicates the selection.

Then swivel the control to adjust the

mirror.

Convex exterior mirrors 3 37.

Electric adjustment 3 37.

Folding exterior mirrors 3 38.

Heated exterior mirrors 3 39.

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,

then engage lever and ensure it is

fully locked. Do not adjust steering

wheel unless vehicle is stationary and

steering wheel lock has been

released.

Airbag system 3 58.

10 In brief

Instrument panel overview

In brief 11

1Power windows ..................... 40

2Exterior mirrors ..................... 37

3Central locking system .......... 25

4Side air vents ...................... 148

5Cruise control ..................... 177

Speed limiter ....................... 179

Adaptive cruise control ....... 180

Forward collision alert ......... 189

6Turn and lane-change

signals, headlight flash,

low/high beam, high beam

assist ................................... 134

Exit lighting ......................... 137

Parking lights ...................... 135

Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 110

7Instruments ........................ 100

Driver Information Centre .... 110

8Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 110

9Head-up display .................. 117

10 Windscreen wiper and

washer, headlight washer,

rear wiper and washer ......... 89

11 Centre air vents .................. 148

12 Hazard warning flashers .... 133

13 Info Display ........................ 116

14 Anti-theft alarm system

status LED ........................... 34

15 Electronic Stability Control . 174

Traction Control system ..... 173

16 Glovebox .............................. 73

Fuse box ............................ 251

17 Controls for Info Display

operation ............................. 116

18 Climate control system ........ 139

19 Power outlet .......................... 93

20 Flexride controls .................. 175

Parking assist / advanced

parking assist ..................... 198

Lane keep assist ................ 217

Eco button for stop-start

system ................................. 156

21 Manual transmission .......... 168

Automatic transmission ...... 164

22 Electric parking brake ......... 170

23 Power switch ....................... 152

24 Steering wheel adjustment ..88

25 Horn ..................................... 89

26 Bonnet release lever .......... 230

28 Light switch ........................ 128

Headlight range

adjustment ......................... 131

Front / rear fog lights .......... 134

Instrument illumination ....... 135

29 Head-up display controls .... 117

12 In brief

Exterior lighting

Automatic light control

AUTO : automatic light control

switches automatically

between daytime running

light and headlight

8: sidelights

9: headlights

Automatic light control 3 129.

Front fog lights 3 134.

Rear fog light 3 134.

Headlight flash, high beam and

low beam

headlight flash : pull lever

high beam : push lever

low beam : push or pull lever

High beam 3 129.

Headlight flash 3 131.

LED headlights 3 132.

High beam assist 3 132.

Turn lights

lever up : right turn lights

lever down : left turn lights

Turn lights 3 134.

Parking lights 3 135.

In brief 13

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.

Hazard warning flashers 3 133.

Horn

Press j.

Washer and wiper systems

Windscreen wiper

HI : fast

LO : slow

INT : interval wiping or automatic

wiping with rain sensor

OFF : off

For a single wipe when the

windscreen wiper is off, press the

lever down to position 1x.

Windscreen wiper 3 89.

Wiper blade replacement 3 236.

14 In brief

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.

Windscreen and headlight washer

system 3 89.

Washer fluid 3 233.

Rear window wiper

OFF : off

INT : intermittent operation

ON : continuous operation

Rear window washer

Push lever.

Washer fluid is sprayed on the rear

window and the wiper wipes a few

times.

Rear window wiper and washer

3 91.

In brief 15

Climate control

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing b.

Heated rear window 3 42.

Heated windscreen

Operated by pressing ,.

Heated windscreen 3 43.

Heated exterior mirrors

Pressing b also operates the heated

exterior mirrors.

Heated exterior mirrors 3 39.

Demisting and defrosting the

windows, air conditioning system

● Press á: fan automatically

switches to higher speed, the air

distribution is directed towards

the windscreen.

● Set temperature control to

warmest level.

● Switch on air conditioning A/C if

required.

● Switch on heated rear window b.

● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the door

windows.

Air conditioning system 3 139.

16 In brief

Demisting and defrosting the

windows, electronic climate

control

● Press à. Temperature and air

distribution are set automatically

and the fan runs at high speed.

● Activate air condition: Press

CLIMATE to show climate control

menu in the Info Display, then

select A/C.

● Switch on heated rear window b.

Electronic climate control system

3 142.

Transmission

Manual transmission

Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,

depress clutch pedal, press the

release button on the selector lever

and engage the gear.

Manual transmission 3 168.

Automatic transmission

P: park position

R: reverse

N: neutral mode

D: automatic mode

M: manual mode

<: upshift

]: downshift

The selector lever can only be moved

out of P when the ignition is on and

the brake pedal is applied. To engage

P or R, press the release button.

Automatic transmission 3 164.

In brief 17

Starting off

Check before starting off

● Tyre pressure 3 254 and

condition 3 291.

● Engine oil level and fluid levels

3 231.

● All windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates are

free from dirt, snow and ice and

are operational.

● Proper position of mirrors 3 37,

seats 3 47 and seat belts

3 57.

● Brake function at low speed,

particularly if the brakes are wet.

Starting the engine

Ignition switch

● Turn key to position 2.

● Move the steering wheel slightly

to release the steering wheel

lock.

● Manual transmission: operate

clutch and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector

lever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Diesel engines: wait until control

indicator ! for preheating

extinguishes.

● Turn key to position 3 and

release after engine has been

started.

Starting the engine 3 154.

To turn the key back from position 2

to 1 or 0, first push the key all the way

in towards the steering column.

18 In brief

Power button

● Manual transmission: operate

clutch and brake pedal.

● Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector

lever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Press Engine Start/Stop button.

● Release button after starting

procedure begins.

Starting the engine 3 154.

Stop-start system

If the vehicle is at a low speed or at a

standstill and certain conditions are

fulfilled, an Autostop is activated.

An Autostop is indicated by the

needle at the AUTOSTOP position in

the tachometer.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Parking

9Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on an

easily ignitable surface. The

high temperature of the

exhaust system could ignite the

surface.

● Always apply the parking

brake. Pull switch m for

approx. one second and check

if the control indicator m

illuminates.

The electric parking brake is

applied when control indicator

m illuminates 3 106.

● Switch off the engine.

● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engage

first gear or set the selector

lever to position P before

removing the ignition key or

switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button. On

an uphill slope, turn the front

wheels away from the kerb.

In brief 19

If the vehicle is on a downhill

slope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to position

P before removing the ignition

key or switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button.

Turn the front wheels towards

the kerb.

● Close the windows and the

sunroof.

● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch or switch off

ignition on vehicles with power

button. Turn the steering wheel

until the steering wheel lock is

felt to engage.

For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the key can only

be removed when the selector

lever is in position P.

● Lock the vehicle by pressing the

button on the door handle or

button e on the remote control.

Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.

● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has been

switched off 3 230.

Caution

After running at high engine

speeds or with high engine loads,

operate the engine briefly at a low

load or run in neutral for

approx. 30 seconds before

switching off, in order to protect

the turbocharger.

Electronic key system 3 22.

Laying the vehicle up for a long period

of time 3 229.

20 Keys, doors and windows

Keys, doors and

windows

Keys, locks ................................... 20

Keys .......................................... 20

Radio remote control ................. 21

Electronic key system ................ 22

Memorised settings ................... 25

Central locking system .............. 25

Automatic locking ...................... 28

Child locks ................................. 29

Doors ........................................... 29

Load compartment .................... 29

Vehicle security ............................ 34

Anti-theft locking system ........... 34

Anti-theft alarm system .............. 34

Immobiliser ................................ 37

Exterior mirrors ............................ 37

Convex shape ........................... 37

Electric adjustment .................... 37

Folding mirrors .......................... 38

Heated mirrors ........................... 39

Automatic dimming .................... 39

Parking assist ............................ 39

Interior mirrors ............................. 39

Manual anti-dazzle .................... 39

Automatic anti-dazzle ................ 40

Windows ...................................... 40

Windscreen ............................... 40

Power windows ......................... 40

Heated rear window .................. 42

Heated windscreen .................... 43

Sun visors .................................. 43

Roof ............................................. 43

Sunroof ...................................... 43

Keys, locks

Keys

Caution

Do not attach heavy or bulky items

to the ignition key.

Replacement keys

The key number is specified on a

detachable tag.

The key number must be quoted

when ordering replacement keys as it

is a component of the immobiliser

system.

Locks 3 272.

Central locking 3 25.

Starting the engine 3 154.

Radio remote control 3 21.

Electronic key 3 22.

The code number of the adapter for

the locking wheel nuts is specified on

a card. It must be quoted when

ordering a replacement adapter.

Wheel changing 3 264.

Keys, doors and windows 21

Replacing battery

Replace the battery as soon as the

system no longer operates properly

or the range is reduced. The need for

battery replacement is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre 3 121.

Batteries do not belong in household

waste. They must be disposed of at

an appropriate recycling collection

point.

To replace:

1. Press button at the back of the

electronic key unit and extract the

key blade from the housing.

2. Insert the key blade again for

approx. 6 mm and turn the key to

open the housing. Further

insertion of the key blade can

damage the housing.

3. Remove and replace battery. Use

CR 2032 or equivalent battery.

Pay attention to the installation

position.

4. Close the housing and insert key

blade.

Radio remote control

22 Keys, doors and windows

Enables operation of the following

functions via the use of the remote

control buttons:

● central locking system 3 25

● anti-theft locking system 3 34

● anti-theft alarm system 3 34

● power windows 3 40

● sunroof 3 43

The remote control has a range of up

to 100 m, but may also be much less

due to external influences. The

hazard warning flashers confirm

operation.

Handle with care, protect from

moisture and high temperatures and

avoid unnecessary operation.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot

be operated with the radio remote

control, the cause may be one of the

following:

● Fault in radio remote control.

● The range is exceeded.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Frequent, repeated operation of

the radio remote control while not

in range, which will require re-

synchronisation.

● Overload of the central locking

system by operating at frequent

intervals, the power supply is

interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power

radio waves from other sources.

Manual unlocking 3 25.

Electronic key system

Enables a keyless operation of the

following functions:

● central locking system 3 25

● switching on ignition and starting

the engine 3 154

The electronic key simply needs to be

on the driver's person.

Additionally, the electronic key

includes the functionality of the radio

remote control:

● central locking system

● anti-theft alarm system

● power windows

The hazard warning flashers confirm

operation.

Handle the device with care, protect

from moisture and high temperatures

and avoid unnecessary operation.

Notice

Do not put the electronic key in the

load compartment.

Keys, doors and windows 23

Electronic key system operation

The electronic key must be outside

the vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the relevant door side.

Unlocking

Press the button on the respective

exterior door handle and pull the

handle.

Unlocking mode can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display. Two settings are

selectable:

● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing the button on any

exterior handle once.

● Only the driver's door and fuel

filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing the button on the

driver's door exterior handle

once. To unlock all doors and

load compartment, press button

twice.

The setting can be changed in the

menu Settings in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Locking

Press the button on any exterior door

handle.

All doors, load compartment and fuel

filler flap will be locked.

24 Keys, doors and windows

The system locks if any of the

following occurs:

● It has been more than

5 seconds since unlocking.

● The button on an exterior handle

has been pressed twice within

5 seconds to unlock the vehicle.

● Any door has been opened and

all doors are now closed.

If the driver's door is not closed

properly, the electronic key remains in

the vehicle or the ignition is not off,

locking will not be permitted.

If there have been two or more

electronic keys in the vehicle and the

ignition was on once, the doors will be

locked even if just one electronic key

is taken out of the vehicle.

Unlocking the tailgate

The tailgate can be unlocked by

pushing the button under the brand

emblem when the electronic key is in

range. The doors remain locked.

Load compartment 3 29.

Unlocking and opening the power

tailgate

The power tailgate can be unlocked

and opened hands-free by moving

the foot below the rear bumper.

Alternatively, press the button switch

under the brand emblem. The

electronic key has to be in range. The

doors remain locked.

Load compartment 3 29.

Operation with buttons on the

electronic key

The central locking system can also

be operated with the buttons on the

electronic key.

Unlocking

Press c.

Unlocking mode can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display. Two settings are

selectable:

● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing c once.

● Only the driver's door and fuel

filler flap will be unlocked by

pressing c once. To unlock all

doors and load compartment,

press c twice.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The setting can be saved for the key

being used.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Locking

Close doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap.

Press e.

Keys, doors and windows 25

If the driver's door is not closed

properly, the central locking system

will not work.

Passive locking

Automatic locking 3 28.

Confirmation

Operation of central locking system is

confirmed by the hazard warning

flashers. A precondition is that the

setting is activated in the vehicle

personalisation 3 122.

Fault

If the central locking cannot be

operated or the engine cannot be

started, the cause may be one of the

following:

● Fault in electronic key.

● Electronic key is out of reception

range.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Overload of the central locking

system by operating at frequent

intervals, the power supply is

interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power

radio waves from other sources.

To rectify the cause of the fault,

change the position of the electronic

key.

Manual unlocking 3 25.

Memorised settings

Whenever the ignition is switched off,

some of the following settings are

automatically memorised by the

currently used remote control unit or

the electronic key:

● automatic climate control

● lighting

● Infotainment system

● central locking system

● FlexRide interactive driving

system

● comfort settings

The saved settings are automatically

used the next time the ignition is

switched on with the memorised

electronic key 3 22.

A precondition is that Personalisation

by Driver is activated in the personal

settings of the Info Display. This must

be set for each electronic key which is

used. The status change is available

only after locking and unlocking the

vehicle.

The assigned memory position of the

power seat is automatically recalled

when switching on ignition and Auto

Memory Recall is activated in the Info

Display for the memorised electronic

key.

Power seat 3 50.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Central locking system

Unlocks and locks doors, load

compartment and fuel filler flap.

A pull on an interior door handle

unlocks the respective door. Pulling

the handle once more opens the door.

26 Keys, doors and windows

Notice

In the event of an accident in which

airbags or belt pretensioners are

deployed, the vehicle is

automatically unlocked.

Notice

A short time after unlocking with the

remote control or electronic key, the

doors are being locked automatically

if no door has been opened. A

precondition is that the setting is

activated in the vehicle

personalisation 3 122.

Central locking buttons

Locks or unlocks all doors, the load

compartment and fuel filler flap from

the passenger compartment via a

switch in the driver's door panel.

Press e to lock.

Press c to unlock.

Operation with the key in case of

a central locking system fault

In case of a fault, e.g. vehicle battery

or electronic key battery is

discharged, the driver's door can be

locked or unlocked with the key blade.

Push the button on the electronic key

and pull out the key blade.

The lock cylinder in the driver's door

is covered by a cap.

Keys, doors and windows 27

Insert the key blade into the recess at

the bottom of the cap and swivel the

key upward.

Manual unlocking

Manually unlock the driver's door by

inserting and turning the key blade in

the lock cylinder.

The other doors can be opened by

pulling the interior handle twice or by

pressing c in the driver's door panel.

The load compartment and fuel filler

flap will possibly not be unlocked.

By switching on the ignition, the anti-

theft locking system is deactivated.

Manual locking

Push inside locking knob of all doors

except driver's door or press e in the

driver's door panel. Then close the

driver's door and lock it from the

outside by turning the key in the lock

cylinder. The fuel filler flap and

tailgate are possibly not locked.

After locking, cover the lock cylinder

with the cap: insert the cap with the

lower side in the recess and push the

cap until it engages at the upper side.

Lock cylinders

Designed to free-wheel if they are

forcefully rotated without the correct

key or if the correct key is not fully

inserted. To reset, turn cylinder with

the correct key until its slot is vertical,

remove key then re-insert it. If the

cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key

through 180° and repeat operation.

28 Keys, doors and windows

Automatic locking

Automatic locking after driving off

This security feature can be

configured to automatically lock all

doors, load compartment and fuel

filler flap after driving off and

exceeding a certain speed.

When at a standstill after driving, the

vehicle will be unlocked automatically

as soon as the ignition is switched off.

Activation or deactivation of

automatic locking can be set in the

menu Settings I Vehicle in the Info

Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The setting can be saved for the

remote control or electronic key being

used 3 25.

Automatic relock after unlocking

This feature can be configured to

automatically lock all doors, load

compartment and fuel filler flap a

short time after unlocking with the

remote control or electronic key,

provided no door has been opened.

Activation or deactivation of

automatic relock can be set in the

menu Settings I Vehicle in the Info

Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The setting can be saved for the

remote control or electronic key being

used 3 25.

Passive locking

This feature locks the vehicle

automatically after several seconds if

an electronic key has been

recognised previously inside the

vehicle, all doors have then been

closed and the electronic key does

not remain within the vehicle.

If the electronic key remains in the

vehicle or the ignition is not off,

passive locking will not be permitted.

If there have been two or more

electronic keys in the vehicle and the

ignition was on once, the feature

locks the vehicle if just one electronic

key is taken out of the vehicle.

To prevent passive locking of the

vehicle e.g. when refuelling or if

passengers remain in the vehicle, the

system must be disabled.

To disable the system, press the

central locking button c for a few

seconds while one door is open. An

acoustic signal sounds three times to

confirm deactivation. The function

remains disabled until the central

locking button e is pressed or the

ignition is switched on.

Activation or deactivation of passive

locking can be set in the menu

Settings I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The setting can be saved for each

electronic key being used 3 25.

Keys, doors and windows 29

Child locks

9Warning

Use the child locks whenever

children are occupying the rear

seats.

Move the pin in the rear door to the

front position. The door cannot be

opened from the inside.

To deactivate, move the pin to the

rear position.

Doors

Load compartment

Tailgate

Opening

Grand Sport

After unlocking, push the brand

emblem and open the tailgate.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

After unlocking, push the button

under the tailgate moulding and open

the tailgate.

Central locking system 3 25.

30 Keys, doors and windows

Closing

Use the interior handle.

Central locking system 3 25.

Power tailgate

9Warning

Take care when operating the

power tailgate. Risk of injury,

particularly to children.

Keep a close watch on the

movable tailgate when operating.

Ensure that nothing becomes

trapped during operating and no

one is standing within the moving

area.

The power tailgate can be operated

by:

● The electronic key.

● Hands-free operation with motion

sensor below the rear bumper.

● The button under the exterior

tailgate moulding and C in the

open tailgate.

● The switch C on the inside of

the driver's door.

On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the tailgate can only be

operated when the vehicle is

stationary and with selector lever in P.

The turn lights flash and a chime

sounds when the power tailgate is

operating.

Notice

Operating the power tailgate does

not operate the central locking

system. To open the tailgate with the

button on the electronic key, or with

the tailgate button or via hands-free

operation, it is not necessary to

unlock the vehicle. A precondition is

that the electronic key is outside the

vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the tailgate.

Do not leave the electronic key in the

load compartment.

Lock the vehicle after closing if it was

unlocked previously.

Central locking system 3 25.

Operation with the electronic key

Keys, doors and windows 31

Press X twice to open or close the

tailgate. To prevent unintended

opening of the tailgate, X must be

pressed longer than during locking or

unlocking.

Hands-free operation with motion

sensor below the rear bumper

To open or close the tailgate, move

the foot in the center area below the

rear bumper back and forth quickly.

Do not hold the foot under the

bumper. The electronic key must be

outside the vehicle, within a range of

approx. 1 m of the tailgate. When foot

motion is being detected by the

sensor, the system actuates the

tailgate after a short delay.

9Danger

Do not touch any vehicle parts

below the vehicle during hands-

free operation. There is a risk of

injury from hot engine parts.

Operation with the button under the

exterior tailgate moulding

To open the tailgate, press the button

under the tailgate moulding until the

tailgate starts to move. If the vehicle

is locked, the electronic key must be

outside the vehicle, within a range of

approx. 1 m of the tailgate.

To close, press C in the open

tailgate until the tailgate starts to

move.

32 Keys, doors and windows

Operation with the switch on the

inside of the driver's door

Press C on the inside of the driver's

door until the tailgate starts to open or

close.

Stop or change direction of

movement

To stop movement of the tailgate

immediately:

● press X once on the electronic

key, or

● press the button under the

exterior tailgate moulding, or

● press C on the open tailgate,

● press C on the inside of the

driver's door.

Pressing one of the switches again

will reverse the direction of

movement.

Operation modes

The power tailgate has three modes

of operation, which are controlled by

the switch C in the driver's door. To

change the mode, turn the switch:

●MAX: Power tailgate opens to full

height.

●3/4: Power tailgate opens to a

reduced height that can be

adjusted.

●Off: Tailgate can only be

operated manually.

Adjust reduced opening height in

operation mode 3/4

1. Turn operation mode switch to

3/4.

2. Open power tailgate with any

operation switch.

3. Stop movement at the desired

height by pressing any operation

switch. If required, manually move

the stopped tailgate to the desired

position.

Keys, doors and windows 33

4. Press and hold the button C on

the inside of the open tailgate for

3 seconds.

Notice

Adjusting opening height should be

programmed at ground level.

A chime sound indicates the new

setting and the turn lights will flash.

The reduced height can only set at an

opening angle of above 30°.

When turning the adjuster wheel in

the driver's door to intermediate mode

3/4, the power tailgate will stop

opening at the newly set position.

The tailgate can only be held open if

a minimum height is exceeded

(minimum opening angle from 30°).

The opening height cannot be

programmed below that height.

Safety function

If the power tailgate encounters an

obstacle during opening or closing,

the direction of movement will

automatically be reversed slightly.

Multiple obstacles in one power cycle

will deactivate the function. In this

case, close or open the tailgate

manually.

The power tailgate has pinch sensors

on the side edges. If the sensors

detect obstacles between tailgate and

chassis, the tailgate will open, until it

is activated again or closed manually.

The safety function is indicated by a

warning chime.

Remove all obstacles before

resuming normal power operation.

If the vehicle is equipped with factory-

fitted towing equipment and a trailer

is electrically connected, the power

tailgate can only be operated

manually.

Overload

If the power tailgate is repeatedly

operated at short intervals, the

function is disabled for some time.

Move tailgate manually into end

position to reset the system.

General hints for operating

tailgate

9Danger

Do not drive with the tailgate open

or ajar, e.g. when transporting

bulky objects, since toxic exhaust

gases, which cannot be seen or

smelled, could enter the vehicle.

This can cause unconsciousness

and even death.

Caution

Before opening the tailgate, check

overhead obstructions, e.g. a

garage door, to avoid damage to

the tailgate. Always check the

moving area above and behind the

tailgate.

34 Keys, doors and windows

Notice

The installation of certain heavy

accessories onto the tailgate may

affect its ability to remain open.

Notice

The operation of the power tailgate

is disabled under low vehicle battery

conditions. In this case, the tailgate

may not even be manually operable.

Notice

With the power tailgate disabled and

all doors unlocked, the tailgate can

only be operated manually. In this

event, manually closing the tailgate

requires significantly greater force.

Notice

At low outside temperatures the

tailgate may not open fully by itself.

In this event, lift the tailgate manually

to its normal end position.

Vehicle security

Anti-theft locking system

9Warning

Do not use the system if there are

people in the vehicle! The doors

cannot be unlocked from the

inside.

The system deadlocks all the doors.

All doors must be closed otherwise

the system cannot be activated.

Unlocking the vehicle disables the

mechanical anti-theft locking system.

This is not possible with the central

locking button inside the vehicle.

Activating

Press e on the remote control or

electronic key twice within 5 seconds.

Anti-theft alarm system

The anti-theft alarm system is

combined with the central locking

system.

It monitors:

● doors, tailgate, bonnet

● passenger compartment

including adjoining load

compartment

Keys, doors and windows 35

● vehicle inclination, e.g. if it is

raised

● ignition

Activation

All doors must be closed and the

electronic key of the electronic key

system must not remain in the

vehicle. Otherwise the system cannot

be activated.

● Radio remote control: activated

30 seconds after locking the

vehicle by pressing e once.

● Electronic key system: activated

30 seconds after locking the

vehicle by pressing the button on

any exterior door handle.

● Radio remote control or

electronic key: directly by

pressing e twice within

5 seconds.

● Electronic key system with

passive locking enabled: briefly

activated after passive locking

occurs.

Notice

Changes to the vehicle interior such

as the use of seat covers, and open

windows or sunroof, could impair the

function of passenger compartment

monitoring.

Activation without monitoring of

passenger compartment and

vehicle inclination

Switch off the monitoring of

passenger compartment and vehicle

inclination when animals are being

left in the vehicle, because of high

volume ultrasonic signals or

movements triggering the alarm. Also

switch off when the vehicle is on a

ferry or train.

1. Close tailgate, bonnet, windows

and sunroof.

2. Press o. LED in the button o

illuminates for a maximum of

10 minutes.

36 Keys, doors and windows

3. Close doors.

4. Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.

Status message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Status LED

Status LED is integrated in the sensor

on top of the instrument panel.

Status during the first 30 seconds of

anti-theft alarm system activation:

LED illuminates : test, arming delay

LED flashes

quickly : doors, tailgate or

bonnet not

completely closed,

or system fault

Status after system is armed:

LED flashes

slowly : system is armed

Seek the assistance of a workshop in

the event of faults.

Deactivation

Radio remote control: Unlocking the

vehicle by pressing c deactivates the

anti-theft alarm system.

Electronic key system: Unlocking the

vehicle by pressing the button on any

exterior door handle deactivates the

anti-theft alarm system.

The electronic key must be outside

the vehicle, within a range of approx.

1 m of the relevant door side.

The system is not deactivated by

unlocking the driver's door manually

or with the central locking button in

the passenger compartment.

Alarm

When triggered, the alarm horn

sounds and the hazard warning lights

flash simultaneously. The number

and duration of alarm signals are

stipulated by legislation.

The alarm can be deactivated by

pressing c on the key, by pressing the

switch on the door handle or

switching on the ignition.

A triggered alarm, which has not been

interrupted by the driver, will be

indicated by the hazard warning

lights. They will flash quickly three

times the next time the vehicle is

unlocked with the remote control or

electronic key. Additionally, a warning

message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre after switching on

the ignition.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Keys, doors and windows 37

If the vehicle's battery is to be

disconnected (e.g. for maintenance

work), the alarm siren must be

deactivated as follows: switch the

ignition on then off, then disconnect

the vehicle's battery within

15 seconds.

Immobiliser

The immobiliser is activated

automatically.

If the control indicator d flashes when

the ignition is on, there is a fault in the

system; the engine cannot be started.

Switch off the ignition and repeat the

start attempt. Retry with the key in the

transmitter pocket. Operation on

vehicles with electronic key system in

case of failure 3 152.

If the control indicator d continues

flashing, attempt to start the engine

using the spare key.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Notice

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID) tags may cause interference

with the key. Do not have it placed

near the key when starting the

vehicle.

Notice

The immobiliser does not lock the

doors. You should always lock the

vehicle after leaving it and switch on

the anti-theft alarm system 3 25,

3 34.

Control indicator d 3 109.

Exterior mirrors

Convex shape

The shape of the mirror makes

objects appear smaller, which will

affect the ability to estimate

distances.

Side blind spot alert 3 205.

Electric adjustment

Select the relevant exterior mirror by

pushing í for left mirror or ì for right

mirror. LED in button indicates the

selection.

38 Keys, doors and windows

Then swivel the control to adjust the

mirror.

Folding mirrors

For pedestrian safety, the exterior

mirrors will swing out of their normal

mounting position if they are struck

with sufficient force. Reposition the

mirror by applying slight pressure to

the mirror housing.

Electric folding

Push n. Both exterior mirrors will

fold.

Push n again to return both exterior

mirrors to their original position.

If an electrically folded mirror is

manually extended, pushing n will

only electrically extend the other

mirror.

Folding mirrors with remote

control or electronic key

Press e again after locking for

1 second to fold in mirrors.

Press c again after unlocking for

1 second to fold out mirrors.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the Vehicle

personalisation.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The settings are automatically stored

for the key being used 3 25.

Keys, doors and windows 39

Heated mirrors

Heating of rear window and exterior

mirrors is operated by pressing b.

LED in button illuminates.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

Automatic dimming

Dazzling by following vehicles in the

dark is automatically reduced by

dimming the exterior mirror on the

driver's side.

Parking assist

For mirrors with position memory, the

exterior mirrors are automatically

aimed at the rear tyres as a parking

aid when reverse gear is selected,

except during trailer operation.

Position memory 3 50.

Activation or deactivation of this

function can be changed in vehicle

personalisation.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Interior mirrors

Manual anti-dazzle

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever on

the underside of the mirror housing.

40 Keys, doors and windows

Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles is

automatically reduced, when driving

in the dark.

Windows

Windscreen

Windscreen stickers

Do not attach stickers such as toll

road stickers or similar on the

windscreen in the area of the interior

mirror. Otherwise the detection zone

of the sensor and the view area of the

camera in the mirror housing could be

restricted.

Windscreen replacement

Caution

If the vehicle has a front-looking

camera sensor for the driver

assistance systems, it is very

important that any windscreen

replacement is performed

accurately according to Vauxhall

specifications. Otherwise, these

systems may not work properly

and there is a risk of unexpected

behaviour and/or messages from

these systems.

Caution

If the vehicle is equipped with a

Head-up display, it is very

important that any windscreen

replacement is performed

accurately according to Vauxhall

specifications. Otherwise, the

system may not work properly and

the image may look out of focus.

Power windows

9Warning

Take care when operating the

power windows. Risk of injury,

particularly to children.

If there are children on the rear

seats, switch on the child safety

system for the power windows.

Keep a close watch on the

windows when closing them.

Ensure that nothing becomes

trapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate power

windows.

Keys, doors and windows 41

Retained power off 3 154.

Operate # for the respective

window by pushing to open or pulling

to close.

Pushing or pulling gently to the first

detent: window moves up or down as

long as the switch is operated.

Pushing or pulling firmly to the second

detent then releasing: window moves

up or down automatically with safety

function enabled. To stop movement,

operate the switch once more in the

same direction.

Safety function

If the window glass encounters

resistance above the middle of the

window during automatic closing, it is

immediately stopped and opened

again.

Override safety function

In the event of closing difficulties due

to frost or the like, switch on the

ignition, then pull the switch to the first

detent and hold. The window moves

up without safety function enabled.

To stop movement, release the

switch.

Child safety system for rear

windows

Press V to deactivate rear door

power windows; the LED illuminates.

To activate, press V again.

Operating windows from outside

The windows can be operated

remotely from outside the vehicle.

42 Keys, doors and windows

Press and hold c for more than

2 seconds to open windows.

Press and hold e for more than

2 seconds to close windows.

Release button to stop window

movement.

If the windows are fully opened or

closed, the hazard warning lights will

flash twice.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedly

operated within short intervals, the

window operation is disabled for

some time.

Initialising the power windows

If the windows cannot be closed

automatically (e.g. after

disconnecting the vehicle battery), a

warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Activate the window electronics as

follows:

1. Close doors.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. Pull the switch until the window is

closed and keep pulling for

additional 2 seconds.

4. Push the switch until the window

is completely open and keep

pushing for additional 2 seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Heated rear window

Heating of rear window and exterior

mirrors is operated by pressing b.

LED in button illuminates.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

Keys, doors and windows 43

Heated windscreen

Operated by pressing ,. LED in

button illuminates.

Heating works with the engine

running and is switched off

automatically after a short time.

Pressing , once more during the

same ignition cycle allows the heating

to operate for another three minutes.

Sun visors

The sun visors can be folded down or

swivelled to the side to prevent

dazzling.

The covers of the mirrors should be

closed when driving.

A ticket holder is located on the

backside of the sun visor.

Roof

Sunroof

9Warning

Take care when operating the

sunroof. Risk of injury, particularly

to children.

Keep a close watch on the

movable parts when operating

them. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped in them as they

move.

Switch on ignition to operate the

sunroof.

44 Keys, doors and windows

Open or close

Press * or r gently to the first

detent: sunroof is opened or closed

as long as the switch is operated.

Press * or r firmly to the second

detent then release: the sunroof is

opened or closed automatically.

During closing the safety function is

enabled. To stop movement, operate

the switch once more.

Raise or close

Press + or r: sunroof is raised or

closed automatically. During closing

the safety function is enabled.

Sunblind

The sunblind is manually operated.

Close or open the sunblind by sliding.

When the sunroof is open, the

sunblind is always open.

General hints

Safety function

If the sunroof encounters resistance

during automatic closing, it is

immediately stopped and opened

again.

Override safety function

In the event of closing difficulties, e.g.

due to frost, hold the switch r

pressed to the second detent. The

sunroof closes with safety function

disabled. To stop movement, release

the switch.

Closing sunroof from outside

The sunroof can be closed remotely

from outside the vehicle.

Press and hold e for more than

2 seconds to close the sunroof.

Release the button to stop the

movement.

Initialising after a power failure

After a power failure, it may only be

possible to operate the sunroof to a

limited extent. Have the system

initialised by your workshop.

Seats, restraints 45

Seats, restraints

Head restraints ............................ 45

Front seats ................................... 47

Seat position .............................. 47

Manual seat adjustment ............ 48

Power seat adjustment .............. 50

Armrest ...................................... 53

Heating ...................................... 54

Ventilating .................................. 54

Massage .................................... 55

Rear seats ................................... 55

Armrest ...................................... 55

Heating ...................................... 55

Seat belts ..................................... 56

Three-point seat belt ................. 57

Airbag system .............................. 58

Front airbag system ................... 61

Side airbag system .................... 62

Curtain airbag system ............... 62

Airbag deactivation .................... 63

Child restraints ............................. 64

Child restraint systems .............. 64

Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 67

Pedestrian protection system ...... 71

Active bonnet ............................. 71 Head restraints

Position

9Warning

Only drive with the head restraint

set to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraint

should be at upper head level. If this

is not possible for extremely tall

people, set to highest position, and

set to lowest position for small people.

46 Seats, restraints

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,

engage.

Horizontal adjustment

Press release button, pull bolster of

head restraint forwards slowly. It

engages in several positions.

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustment

Pull the head restraint upwards or

press the catch to release and push

the head restraint downwards.

Removal of rear head restraints

In order to extend the load

compartment, for example 3 75.

Seats, restraints 47

Press both catches, pull the head

restraint upwards and remove.

Front seats

Seat position

9Warning

Only drive with the seat correctly

adjusted.

9Danger

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to the

steering wheel, to permit safe

airbag deployment.

9Warning

Never adjust seats while driving as

they could move uncontrollably.

9Warning

Never store any objects under the

seats.

● Sit with buttocks as far back

against the backrest as possible.

Adjust the distance between the

seat and the pedals so that legs

are slightly angled when fully

pressing the pedals. Slide the

front passenger seat as far back

as possible.

● Set seat height high enough to

have a clear field of vision on all

sides and of all display

instruments. There should be at

least one hand of clearance

between head and the roof

frame. Your thighs should rest

lightly on the seat without

pressing into it.

48 Seats, restraints

● Sit with shoulders as far back

against the backrest as possible.

Set the backrest rake so that it is

possible to easily reach the

steering wheel with arms slightly

bent. Maintain contact between

shoulders and the backrest when

turning the steering wheel. Do

not angle the backrest too far

back. We recommend a

maximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel in

a way that the wrist rests on top

of the steering wheel while the

arm is fully extended and

shoulders on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 88.

● Adjust the head restraint 3 45.

● Adjust the thigh support so that

there is a space approx. two

fingers wide between the edge of

the seat and the hollow of the

knee.

● Adjust the lumbar support so that

it supports the natural shape of

the spine.

Manual seat adjustment

Drive only with engaged seats and

backrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, release

handle. Try to move the seat back and

forth to ensure that the seat is locked

in place.

Backrest inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean on

backrest when adjusting.

Seats, restraints 49

Seat height

Lever pumping motion

up : seat higher

down : seat lower

Seat inclination

Press switch

top : front end higher

bottom : front end lower

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-

way switch to suit personal

requirements.

Moving support up and down: push

switch up or down.

Increasing and decreasing support:

push switch forwards or backwards.

50 Seats, restraints

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thigh

support.

Power seat adjustment

9Warning

Care must be taken when

operating the power seats. There

is a risk of injury, particularly for

children. Objects could become

trapped.

Keep a close watch on the seats

when adjusting them. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment

Move switch forwards / backwards.

Seat height

Move switch upwards / downwards.

Seat inclination

Seats, restraints 51

Tilt front of switch upwards /

downwards.

Backrest inclination

Tilt switch forwards / backwards.

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the

four-way switch to suit personal

requirements.

Moving support up and down: push

switch up or down.

Increasing and decreasing support:

push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thigh

support.

52 Seats, restraints

Side bolster

Adjust seat backrest width to suit

personal requirements.

Press e to reduce backrest width.

Press d to increase backrest width.

Memory function for power seat

adjustment and exterior mirrors

Two different driver's seat and

exterior mirror settings can be stored.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Storing memory position

● Adjust driver's seat and then

adjust exterior mirrors to desired

positions.

● Press and hold MEM and 1 or 2

simultaneously until a chime

sounds.

Recall of memory positions

Press and hold button1 or 2 until the

stored seat and exterior mirror

positions have been reached.

Releasing the button during seat

movement cancels the recall.

Automatic recall of memory positions

Memory positions are assigned to the

driver (1 or 2) using the respective key

and are automatically recalled when

the ignition is switched on. In addition,

a message in the Driver Information

Centre indicates the driver number,

identified by the used key. If the

ignition is switched on more than

three subsequent times with the

same key, the message will not be

displayed again until another key is

being used.

To stop recall movement, press one

of the memory-, power mirror- or

power seat controls.

Precondition is that Personalization

By Driver and Auto Memory Recall is

activated in the personal settings of

the Info Display.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in the

Vehicle menu in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Seats, restraints 53

Easy exit function

For a convenient exit out of the

vehicle, the power driver seat moves

rearwards when vehicle is stationary.

To activate the easy exit function:

● set selector lever to position P

(automatic transmission)

● apply parking brake (manual

transmission)

● switch off ignition

● remove key from the ignition

switch

● open the driver's door

If the door has already been opened,

switch off ignition to activate easy

exit.

To stop movement, press one of the

memory or power seat controls.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in the

Vehicle menu in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Safety function

If the driver's seat encounters

resistance during movement, the

recall may stop. After removing the

obstruction, press and hold the

appropriate memory position button

for two seconds. Try recalling the

memory position again. If the recall

does not operate, consult a

workshop.

Overload

If the seat setting is electrically

overloaded, the power supply is

automatically cut-off for a short time.

Notice

After an accident in which airbags

have been deployed, the memory

function for each position button will

be deactivated.

Armrest

Push button and fold armrest

upwards. Under the armrest there is

a storage compartment and an

inductive charger.

Inductive charging 3 94.

54 Seats, restraints

Heating

Adjust heating to the desired setting

by pressing ß for the respective seat

one or more times. The control

indicator in the button indicates the

setting.

Prolonged use of the highest setting

for people with sensitive skin is not

recommended.

The seat heating will be reduced

automatically from highest level to

medium level after 30 minutes.

Seat heating is operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Automatic seat heating

Depending on the equipment, the

automatic seat heating can be

enabled in the vehicle personalisation

menu in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

When enabled, the heating of the

seats will be activated automatically

at vehicle start. The activation is

based on several parameters such as

vehicle interior temperature, intensity

and direction of the sun and

temperature setting of the electronic

climate control system for the driver

and passenger side.

As the vehicle's interior warms up, the

seat heating level will be reduced

automatically until it finally goes off.

The seat heating level being provided

during the automatic operation is

shown by heated seat indicator lights.

If the passenger seat is unoccupied,

the automatic seat heating feature will

not activate the seat heating for that

seat.

The seat heating buttons can be

pressed at any time to exit the

automatic seat heating for the

respective seat and control the seat

heating manually instead.

Ventilating

Adjust ventilation to the desired

setting by pressing A for the

respective seat one or more times.

The control indicator in the button

indicates the setting.

Ventilated seats are operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Seats, restraints 55

Massage

Press c to switch on the back

massage function.

To switch off, press c again. The

current massage procedure will be

ended, this may take a few seconds.

After ten minutes the massage

function is switched off automatically.

Rear seats

Armrest

Fold armrest down. The armrest

contains cupholders.

Heating

Activate seat heating by pressing ß

for the respective rear outer seat.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button.

Press ß once more to deactivate seat

heating.

Prolonged use for people with

sensitive skin is not recommended.

Seat heating is operational when

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

56 Seats, restraints

Seat belts

The seat belts are locked during

heavy acceleration or deceleration of

the vehicle, holding the occupants in

the seat position. Thereby the risk of

injury is considerably reduced.

9Warning

Fasten seat belt before each trip.

In the event of an accident, people

not wearing seat belts endanger

their fellow occupants and

themselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used by

only one person at a time.

Child restraint system 3 64.

Periodically check all parts of the belt

system for damage, soiling and

proper functionality.

Have damaged components replaced

by a workshop. After an accident,

have the belts and triggered belt

pretensioners replaced by a

workshop.

Notice

Make sure that the belts are not

damaged by shoes or sharp-edged

objects or are trapped. Prevent dirt

from getting into the belt retractors.

Seat belt reminder

Indicates seat belt status for front

seats by control indicators X and k,

or for rear seats by the symbol X in

the Driver Information Centre 3 104.

Belt force limiters

Stress on the body is reduced by the

gradual release of the belt during a

collision.

Belt pretensioners

In the event of a head-on, rear-end or

side-on collision of a certain severity,

the front and rear outer seat belts are

tightened.

9Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or

fitting of belts) can trigger the belt

pretensioners.

Deployment of the belt pretensioners

is indicated by continuous illumination

of control indicator v 3 105.

Triggered belt pretensioners must be

replaced by a workshop. Belt

pretensioners can only be triggered

once.

Notice

Do not affix or install accessories or

other objects that may interfere with

the operation of the belt

pretensioners. Do not make any

modifications to belt pretensioner

components as this will invalidate

the operating permit of your vehicle.

Seats, restraints 57

Three-point seat belt

Fasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor,

guide it untwisted across the body

and insert the latch plate into the

buckle. Tighten the lap belt regularly

whilst driving by pulling the shoulder

belt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents the

belt from fitting snugly. Do not place

objects such as handbags or mobile

phones between the belt and your

body.

9Warning

The belt must not rest against hard

or fragile objects in the pockets of

your clothing.

Seat belt reminder X, k 3 104.

Unfasten

To release belt, press red button on

belt buckle.

58 Seats, restraints

Using the seat belt while pregnant

9Warning

The lap belt must be positioned as

low as possible across the pelvis

to prevent pressure on the

abdomen.

Airbag system

The airbag system consists of a

number of individual systems

depending on the scope of

equipment.

When triggered, the airbags inflate

within milliseconds. They also deflate

so quickly that it is often unnoticeable

during the collision.

9Warning

The airbag system deploys in an

explosive manner, repairs must be

performed by skilled personnel

only.

9Warning

Adding accessories that change

the vehicle's frame, bumper

system, height, front end or side

sheet metal, may keep the airbag

system from working properly. The

operation of the airbag system can

also be affected by changing any

parts of the front seats, seat belts,

airbag sensing and diagnostic

module, steering wheel,

instrument panel, inner door seals

including the speakers, any of the

airbag modules, ceiling or pillar

trim, front sensors, side impact

sensors or airbag wiring.

Notice

The airbag systems and belt

pretensioner control electronics are

located in the centre console area.

Do not put any magnetic objects in

this area.

Do not affix any objects onto the

airbag covers and do not cover them

with other materials. Have damaged

covers replaced by a workshop.

Each airbag is triggered only once.

Have deployed airbags replaced by

a workshop. Furthermore, it may be

necessary to have the steering

wheel, the instrument panel, parts of

the panelling, the door seals,

handles and the seats replaced.

Seats, restraints 59

Do not make any modifications to

the airbag system as this will

invalidate the vehicle operating

permit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems

3 105.

Child restraint systems on front

passenger seat with airbag

systems

Warning according to ECE R94.02:

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facing

child restraint on a seat protected by

an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the

CHILD can occur.

DE: Nach hinten gerichtete

Kindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitz

verwenden, der durch einen davor

befindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAG

geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oder

SCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DES

KINDES zur Folge haben kann.

FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un siège

d'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur un

siège protégé par un COUSSIN

GONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,

sous peine d'infliger des

BLESSURES GRAVES, voire

MORTELLES à l'ENFANT.

ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema de

retención infantil orientado hacia

atrás en un asiento protegido por un

AIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligro

de MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVES

para el NIÑO.

RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ

устанавливать детское

удерживающее устройство лицом

назад на сиденье автомобиля,

оборудованном фронтальной

подушкой безопасности, если

ПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это

может привести к СМЕРТИ или

СЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМ

РЕБЕНКА.

NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaarts

gericht kinderzitje op een stoel met

een ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, om

DODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL van

het KIND te voorkomen.

DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt

autostol på et forsæde med AKTIV

AIRBAG, BARNET kan komme i

LIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGT

TIL SKADE.

SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd

barnstol på ett säte som skyddas med

en framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.

DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGA

SKADOR kan drabba BARNET.

FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäin

suunnattua lasten turvaistuinta

istuimelle, jonka edessä on

AKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSI

VOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUA

VAKAVASTI.

NO: Bakovervendt

barnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukes

på et sete med AKTIV

KOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kan

60 Seats, restraints

føre til at BARNET utsettes for

LIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGE

SKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema de

retenção para crianças voltado para

trás num banco protegido com um

AIRBAG ACTIVO na frente do

mesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DE

VIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES na

CRIANÇA.

IT: Non usare mai un sistema di

sicurezza per bambini rivolto

all'indietro su un sedile protetto da

AIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:

pericolo di MORTE o LESIONI

GRAVI per il BAMBINO!

EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικό

κάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς τα

πίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεται

από μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,

διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστεί

ΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟ

ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.

PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelika

dziecięcego zwróconego tyłem do

kierunku jazdy na fotelu, przed

którym znajduje się WŁĄCZONA

PODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.

Niezastosowanie się do tego

zalecenia może być przyczyną

ŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCH

OBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.

TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyet

sistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde bir

AKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ile

korunmakta olan bir koltukta

kullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİR

veya AĞIR ŞEKİLDE

YARALANABİLİR.

UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйте

систему безпеки для дітей, що

встановлюється обличчям назад,

на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮ

ПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше це

може призвести до СМЕРТІ чи

СЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯ

ДИТИНИ.

HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelé

néző biztonsági gyerekülést előlről

AKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,

mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagy

KOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.

HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustav

zadržavanja za djecu okrenut prema

natrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIM

ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,

to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI ili

OZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.

SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega

varnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega v

nasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z

AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNO

BLAZINO, saj pri tem obstaja

nevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIH

POŠKODB za OTROKA.

SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosni

sistem za decu u kome su deca

okrenuta unazad na sedištu sa

AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM

JASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato što

DETE može da NASTRADA ili da se

TEŠKO POVREDI.

MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детско

седиште свртено наназад на

седиште заштитено со АКТИВНО

ВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,

затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕ

или да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.

BG: НИКОГА не използвайте

детска седалка, гледаща назад,

върху седалка, която е защитена

чрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНА

ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може да

се стигне до СМЪРТ или

СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на

ДЕТЕТО.

Seats, restraints 61

RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaun

pentru copil îndreptat spre partea din

spate a maşinii pe un scaun protejat

de un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;

acest lucru poate duce la DECESUL

sau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ a

COPILULUI.

CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětský

zádržný systém instalovaný proti

směru jízdy na sedadle, které je

chráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍM

AIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít k

VÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍ

DÍTĚTE.

SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskú

sedačku otočenú vzad na sedadle

chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,

pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI alebo

VÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.

LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgal

atgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemos

sėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVI

ORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALI

ŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.

LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀ

neizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstu

bērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiek

aizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītu

AKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jo

pretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūt

SMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.

ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoole

suunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, mille

ees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGA

kaitstud iste, sest see võib

põhjustada LAPSE SURMA või

TÕSISE VIGASTUSE.

MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal li

jħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sit

protett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;

dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jew

ĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.

GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachta

linbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán a

bhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os a

chomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚ

DONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.

Beyond the warning required by

ECE R94.02, for safety reasons a

forward-facing child restraint system

must only be used subject to the

instructions and restrictions in the

table 3 67.

The airbag label is located on both

sides of the front passenger sun visor.

Airbag deactivation 3 63.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system consists of

one airbag in the steering wheel and

one in the instrument panel on the

front passenger side. These can be

identified by the word AIRBAG.

The front airbag system is triggered in

the event of a front-end impact of a

certain severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the upper body and head of

the front seat occupants

considerably.

62 Seats, restraints

9Warning

Optimum protection is only

provided when the seat is in the

proper position.

Seat position 3 47.

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

Fit the seat belt correctly and

engage securely. Only then is the

airbag able to protect.

Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of an

airbag in each front seat backrest and

in the rear outer seat backrests. This

can be identified by the word

AIRBAG.

The side airbag system is triggered in

the event of a side impact of a certain

severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the upper body and pelvis in

the event of a side-on collision

considerably.

9Warning

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

Notice

Only use protective seat covers that

have been approved for the vehicle.

Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag system

The curtain airbag system consists of

an airbag in the roof frame on each

side. This can be identified by the

word AIRBAG on the roof pillars.

The curtain airbag system is triggered

in the event of a side-on impact of a

certain severity. The ignition must be

switched on.

Seats, restraints 63

The inflated airbags cushion the

impact, thereby reducing the risk of

injury to the head in the event of a

side-on impact considerably.

9Warning

Keep the area in which the airbag

inflates clear of obstructions.

The hooks on the handles in the

roof frame are only suitable for

hanging up light articles of

clothing, without coat hangers. Do

not keep any items in these

clothes.

Airbag deactivation

The front passenger airbag system

must be deactivated for child restraint

system on the passenger seat

according to the instructions in the

table 3 67. The side airbag and

curtain airbag systems, the belt

pretensioners and all driver airbag

systems will remain active.

The front passenger airbag system

can be deactivated via a key-

operated switch on the passenger

side of the instrument panel.

Use the ignition key or the key blade,

located in the electronic key, to

choose the position:

OFF : front passenger airbag is

deactivated and will not

inflate in the event of a

collision. Control indicator

* OFF illuminates

continuously in the centre

console

ON : front passenger airbag is

active

64 Seats, restraints

9Danger

Deactivate passenger airbag only

in combination with the use of a

child restraint system, subject to

the instructions and restrictions in

the table 3 67.

Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal

injury for a person occupying a

seat with a deactivated front

passenger airbag.

If the control indicator V illuminates

for approx. 60 seconds after the

ignition is switched on, the front

passenger airbag system will inflate

in the event of a collision.

If the control indicator * illuminates

after the ignition is switched on, the

front passenger airbag system is

deactivated. It stays on while the

airbag is deactivated.

If both control indicators are

illuminated at the same time, there is

a system failure. The status of the

system is not discernible, therefore

no person is allowed to occupy the

front passenger seat. Contact a

workshop immediately.

Consult a workshop immediately if

neither of the two control indicators

are illuminated.

Change status only when the vehicle

is stopped with the ignition off.

Status remains until the next change.

Control indicator for airbag

deactivation 3 105.

Child restraints

Child restraint systems

9Danger

If using a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger

seat, the airbag system for the

front passenger seat must be

deactivated. This also applies to

certain forward-facing child

restraint systems as indicated in

the tables 3 67.

Airbag deactivation 3 63.

Airbag label 3 58.

We recommend a child restraint

system which is tailored specifically to

the vehicle. For further information,

contact your workshop.

When a child restraint system is being

used, pay attention to the following

usage and installation instructions

and also those supplied with the child

restraint system.

Seats, restraints 65

Always comply with local or national

regulations. In some countries, the

use of child restraint systems is

forbidden on certain seats.

Child restraint systems can be

fastened with:

● Three-point seat belt

● ISOFIX brackets

● Top-tether anchor

Three-point seat belt

Child restraint systems can be

fastened by using a three-point seat

belt. Depending on the size of the

used child restraint systems, up to

three child restraint systems can be

attached to the rear seats. After

fastening the child restraint system,

the seat belt has to be tightened

3 67.

ISOFIX brackets

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX

child restraint systems to the ISOFIX

brackets. Specific vehicle ISOFIX

child restraint system positions are

marked in the ISOFIX table 3 67.

ISOFIX brackets are indicated by a

label on the backrest.

An i-Size child restraint system is an

universal ISOFIX child restraint

system according UN Regulation No.

129.

All i-Size child restraint systems can

be used on any vehicle seat suitable

for i-Size, i-Size table 3 67.

Either a Top-tether strap or a support

leg must be used in addition to the

ISOFIX brackets.

i-Size child seats and vehicle seats

with i-Size approval are marked with

i-Size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchors

Top-tether anchors are marked with

the symbol : for a child seat.

66 Seats, restraints

In addition to the ISOFIX mounting

brackets, fasten the Top-tether strap

to the Top-tether anchors.

ISOFIX child restraint systems of

universal category positions are

marked in the table by IUF 3 67.

Selecting the right system

The rear seats are the most

convenient location to fasten a child

restraint system.

Children should travel facing

rearwards in the vehicle as long as

possible. This makes sure that the

child's backbone, which is still very

weak, is under less strain in the event

of an accident.

Suitable are restraint systems that

comply with valid UN ECE

regulations. Check local laws and

regulations for mandatory use of child

restraint systems.

The following child restraints are

recommended for the following

weight classes:

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix for children up to

13 kg for group 0, group 0+ and Duo

Plus for children from 13 kg to 18 kg

in group I.

Ensure that the child restraint system

to be installed is compatible with the

vehicle type.

Ensure that the mounting location of

the child restraint system within the

vehicle is correct, see following

tables.

Allow children to enter and exit the

vehicle only on the side facing away

from the traffic.

When the child restraint system is not

in use, secure the seat with a seat belt

or remove it from the vehicle.

Notice

Do not affix anything on the child

restraint systems and do not cover

them with any other materials.

A child restraint system which has

been subjected to stress in an

accident must be replaced.

Seats, restraints 67

Child restraint installation locations

Permissible options for fastening a child restraint system with a three-point seat belt

Weight class

On front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg XU1,2 U/L3U

Group 0+: up to 13 kg XU1,2 U/L3U

Group I: 9 to 18 kg XU1,2 U/L3,4 U4

Group II: 15 to 25 kg U1,2 XU/L3,4 U4

Group III: 22 to 36 kg U1,2 XU/L3,4 U4

U : universal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat belt

L : suitable for particular child restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories. The

child restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child restraint

system)

X : no child restraint system permitted in this weight class

1: move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point

2: move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side

3: move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary

4: adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

68 Seats, restraints

Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

Weight class Size class Fixture

On front passenger seat On rear outboard

seats On rear centre

seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg G ISO/L2 X X X X

F ISO/L1 X X X X

E ISO/R1 X X IL3X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL3X

D ISO/R2 X X IL3X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3X

Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL3,4 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3,4 X

B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF3,4 X

A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X X IL3,4 X

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X X IL3,4 X

Seats, restraints 69

IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories.

The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child

restraint system)

IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight class

X : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class

1: move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary to a vertical position

to ensure that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point

2: move seat height adjustment upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary

to a vertical position to ensure that the belt is tight on the buckle side

3: move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary

4: adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

ISOFIX size class and seat device

A – ISO/F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

B – ISO/F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

B1 – ISO/F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kg

C – ISO/R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kg

D – ISO/R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kg

E – ISO/R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kg

F– ISO/L1 : left lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

G – ISO/L2 : right lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

Permissible options for fitting an i-Size child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

On front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

i-Size child restraint systems X X i - U X

70 Seats, restraints

i - U : suitable for i-Size 'universal' forward and rearward facing child restraint systems

X : seating position not suitable for i-Size 'universal' child restraint systems

Seats, restraints 71

Pedestrian protection

system

Active bonnet

Pedestrian protection system can

help to reduce the injury of

pedestrians in case of a front

collision.

When the sensors in the front bumper

detect a certain impact within the

speed range of 15 mph to 31 mph, the

rear part of the bonnet will be lifted to

reduce pedestrians head injuries.

In addition the front bumper is

designed to reduce leg injuries of

pedestrians.

The active bonnet can be triggered

only once and remains in the raised

position. A message is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre.

Seek the assistance of a workshop as

soon as possible, thereby adapting

the driving style, to have the

actuators, hinges and bonnet

replaced.

9Warning

Do not drive with the bonnet

raised.

9Warning

After any frontal accident the front

bumper may appear to be intact,

however, the sensors may be

damaged. Consult a workshop to

verify proper functionality of the

sensors.

The system may not trigger under the

following conditions:

● The impact is out of sensor

range.

● The sensors are damaged or

blocked by accessory parts.

● The bonnet is blocked by snow or

ice.

● The vehicle speed is not within

the range.

● The object is too small.

Manually bonnet lowering

9Warning

After the system has triggered, the

hinges of the bonnet are hot. Do

not touch.

To manually lower the triggered

bonnet for driving to the next

workshop:

1. Pull the bonnet release lever.

2. Push the safety catch to left

vehicle side.

3. Open the bonnet approx. 20 cm

and lower it slowly without

engaging.

4. Push down bonnet with both

hands at rear corners in small

steps alternating between right

and left side.

9Warning

Be sure to keep away from the

edge of the bonnet to prevent

injuries.

72 Seats, restraints

5. Check that the bonnet is engaged

at the rear.

6. Close bonnet at the front and

check that it is engaged 3 230.

Storage 73

Storage

Storage compartments ................ 73

Glovebox ................................... 73

Cupholders ................................ 73

Front storage ............................. 74

Sunglasses storage ................... 74

Armrest storage ......................... 74

Centre console storage ............. 74

Load compartment ....................... 75

Rear storage .............................. 78

Load compartment cover ........... 78

Rear floor storage cover ............ 80

Lashing eyes ............................. 80

Cargo management system ...... 80

Safety net .................................. 81

Warning triangle ........................ 83

First aid kit ................................. 84

Roof rack system ......................... 85

Roof rack ................................... 85

Loading information ..................... 85

Storage compartments

9Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp

objects in the storage

compartments. Otherwise, the

storage compartment lid could

open and vehicle occupants could

be injured by objects being thrown

around in the event of hard

braking, a sudden change in

direction or an accident.

Glovebox

The glovebox should be closed whilst

driving.

Cupholders

Cupholders are located in the centre

console behind a cover. Open the

cover.

74 Storage

Additional cupholders are located in

the rear armrest. Fold down armrest.

Front storage

A storage box is located in the centre

console. Push cover to the front.

Sunglasses storage

Fold down and open.

Do not use for storing heavy objects.

Armrest storage

Storage under the front armrest

Push button to fold up the armrest.

Centre console storage

The storage container can be used to

store small items.

Depending on the version, the

storage compartment is located

under a cover.

Storage 75

Press cover at the rear to open.

Load compartment

Depending on the equipment, the

rear seat backrest is divided into two

or three parts. All parts can be folded

down.

Before folding rear seat backrests,

execute the following if necessary:

● Remove the load compartment

cover 3 78.

● Press and hold the catch to push

the head restraints down 3 45.

● Remove the rear head restraints

to have the backrests fully rest on

the seat cushions 3 45.

Load compartment extension

(two-part rear seat backrest)

● Pull the release lever on one or

both outer sides and fold down

the backrests onto the seat

cushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly. Make sure that the belts

are positioned correctly and stay

clear of the folding area.

76 Storage

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark near

the release levers are no longer

visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment extension

(three-part rear seat backrest)

● Fold up the rear armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down the

backrest of the centre seat.

Storage 77

● Pull the release lever on one or

both outer sides and fold down

the backrests onto the seat

cushion.

9Warning

Take care when folding down the

right outer seat backrest if the

centre seat backrest is already

folded down. Risk of injury due to

bolt protruding from the inner side

of the backrest.

● Alternatively fold seat backrests

from the load compartment: pull

switch on left or right sidewall of

the load compartment to fold the

corresponding part of the rear

seat backrest.

9Warning

Take care when operating the rear

backrests from the load

compartment. The backrest is

folded with considerable force.

Risk of injury, particularly to

children.

Ensure that nothing is attached to

the rear seats or located on the

seat cushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrests

and guide them into an upright

position until they engage

audibly. Make sure that the belts

are positioned correctly and stay

clear of the folding area.

The backrests are properly

engaged when the red mark on

the release levers on both sides

are no longer visible.

9Warning

When folding up, ensure that

backrests are securely locked in

position before driving. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury

or damage to the load or vehicle in

the event of hard braking or a

collision.

78 Storage

The seat belt of the centre seat could

be blocked when the backrest is

folded up too quickly. To unlock the

retractor, push in the seat belt or pull

it out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Rear storage

Storage box

A storage box is located in the load

compartment. Remove the cover to

gain access to the storage box.

Rear floor storage cover 3 80.

Load compartment cover

Do not place any objects on the cover.

Grand Sport

Removing cover

Unhook retaining straps from tailgate.

Storage 79

Lift cover at the rear.

Remove the cover.

Fitting cover

Engage cover in side guides and fold

downwards. Attach the retaining

straps to the tailgate.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Closing roller blind

Pull the roller blind using the handle

towards the rear and upwards until it

engages in the sideward retainers.

Opening roller blind

Pull the roller blind handle to the rear

and downwards. It rolls up

automatically.

Opening roller blind in load position

Press the roller blind handle.

The rear of the roller blind is guided

upwards automatically.

Removing roller blind

Open the roller blind.

Pull the release lever on the right side

up an hold it. Lift the roller blind first

on the right side and remove from

retrainers.

Installing roller blind

Insert the left side of the roller blind in

recess, then pull release lever up.

Hold and insert the right side of the

roller blind in recess and engage.

80 Storage

Rear floor storage cover

Grand Sport

The rear floor cover can be removed.

Raise cover at the loop and remove.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

The rear floor cover can be folded up.

Pull the handle and fold the rear part

of the cover forward.

Set up the folded cover upright behind

the rear seat backrests.

Lashing eyes

The lashing eyes are designed to

secure items against slippage. They

should be used for attaching lashing

straps or a luggage net.

Cargo management system

The cargo rail system is a movable

system to secure items at the the load

compartment floor against slippage.

Storage 81

Mounting carriages in the rail

Insert carriages into the rails at the

load compartment floor. Thereby use

the recess in the rail and press the

button on the carriage while inserting

it.

Using the lashing eyes

Press the button on a carriage and

slide it to the required position. Fold

out the lashing eyes to use them.

Removing

Retract the lashing eyes. Press the

button of a carriage and remove it

from the rail through the recess.

Safety net

The safety net can be installed behind

the rear seats. If the rear seat

backrests are folded, the safety net

can be installed behind the front

seats.

Passengers must not be transported

behind the safety net.

Installation

Behind the rear seats

● Insert the cassette into retainers

on left and right side. Note the

signs L (left side) and R (right

side) on the cassette as an

installation hint.

Turn cassette slightly forward

until the arrows face each other,

to lock the cassette.

82 Storage

● Pull holding rod out of cassette.

Suspend and engage holding rod

into an installation opening on

one side of the roof frame.

Compress rod and suspend and

engage at the other side.

Remove load compartment cover

3 78.

Behind the front seats

● Suspend and engage holding rod

into installation opening on one

side of the roof frame. Compress

rod, suspend and engage at the

other side. Pull holding rod out of

cassette.

● Attach hooks of safety net

cassette to lashing eyes in the

floor in front of rear seats. To get

access to the lashing eyes, push

hooks in the perforated parts in

the floor cover on both sides.

● Tension both straps by pulling at

the loose end.

● Push down head restraints and

fold down rear seat backrests

3 75.

Storage 83

Removal

Behind the rear seats

● Remove and compress one side

of holding rod from installation

opening. Remove other side of

holding rod from installation

opening.

● Roll up safety net.

● Turn cassette slightly backwards

to unlock and remove from

retainers.

Behind the front seats

● Pull the flap at the tightener on

both sides to release the straps.

● Remove and compress one side

of holding rod from installation

opening. Remove other side of

holding rod from installation

opening.

● Roll up safety net.

● Detach hooks from the lashing

eyes.

Warning triangle

Grand Sport

Stow the warning triangle in the

recess at the rear of the load

compartment.

84 Storage

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Stow the warning triangle on the

tailgate inner panelling and secure it

with the straps.

First aid kit

Grand Sport

Stow the first aid kit on the right side

of the load compartment and secure

it with the strap.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Stow the first aid kit on the tailgate

inner panelling and secure it with the

straps.

Storage 85

Roof rack system

Roof rack

For safety reasons and to avoid

damage to the roof, the vehicle

approved roof rack system is

recommended. For further

information, contact your workshop.

Mounting roof rack

Grand Sport

Open all doors.

Mounting points are located in each

door frame of the vehicle body.

Fasten the roof rack according to the

installation instructions delivered with

the roof rack.

Remove the roof rack when not in

use.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Mounting points are located in both

roof railings.

Fasten the roof rack on the first two

mounting points according to the

installation instructions delivered with

the roof rack.

Remove the roof rack when not in

use.

Loading information

● Heavy objects in the load

compartment should be placed

against the seat backrests. Make

sure that the backrests are

securely engaged, i.e. no longer

showing the red markings behind

the release levers. If objects can

be stacked, heavier objects

should be placed at the bottom.

● Prevent sliding of loose objects

by securing them with straps

attached to the lashing eyes

3 80.

86 Storage

● Do not allow the load to protrude

above the upper edge of the

backrests.

● Do not place any objects on the

load compartment cover or the

instrument panel, and do not

cover the sensor on top of the

instrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct the

operation of the pedals, parking

brake and gear selector, or

hinder the freedom of movement

of the driver. Do not place any

unsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open load

compartment.

9Warning

Always ensure that the load in the

vehicle is securely stowed.

Otherwise objects can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and

cause personal injury or damage

to the load or vehicle.

● The payload is the difference

between the permitted gross

vehicle weight (see identification

plate 3 279) and the EC kerb

weight.

To calculate the payload, enter

the data for your vehicle in the

weights table at the front of this

manual.

The EC kerb weight includes

weights for the driver (68 kg),

luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel

tank 90% full).

Optional equipment and

accessories increase the kerb

weight.

● Driving with a roof load increases

the sensitivity of the vehicle to

cross-winds and has a

detrimental effect on vehicle

handling due to the vehicle's

higher centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly and

secure it properly with retaining

straps. Adjust the tyre pressure

and vehicle speed according to

the load conditions. Check and

retighten the straps frequently.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph.

The permissible roof load is

100 kg. The roof load is the

combined weight of the roof rack

and the load.

Instruments and controls 87

Instruments and

controls

Controls ....................................... 88

Steering wheel adjustment ........ 88

Steering wheel controls ............. 88

Heated steering wheel ............... 88

Horn ........................................... 89

Windscreen wiper and washer ..89

Rear window wiper and

washer ...................................... 91

Outside temperature .................. 92

Clock ......................................... 92

Power outlets ............................. 93

Inductive charging ..................... 94

Ashtrays .................................... 95

Warning lights, gauges and indi‐

cators ........................................... 96

Instrument cluster ...................... 96

Speedometer ........................... 100

Odometer ................................ 101

Trip odometer .......................... 101

Tachometer ............................. 102

Fuel gauge .............................. 102

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 102

Service display ........................ 103

Control indicators .................... 104

Turn lights ................................ 104

Seat belt reminder ................... 104

Airbag and belt tensioners ....... 105

Airbag deactivation .................. 105

Charging system ..................... 105

Malfunction indicator light ........ 105

Brake and clutch system ......... 106

Electric parking brake .............. 106

Electric parking brake fault ...... 106

Antilock brake system (ABS) ... 106

Gear shifting ............................ 107

Following distance ................... 107

Lane keep assist ..................... 107

Electronic Stability Control off . 107

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system ......... 107

Traction Control system off ..... 107

Engine coolant temperature .... 107

Preheating ............................... 108

AdBlue ..................................... 108

Tyre pressure monitoring

system .................................... 108

Engine oil pressure .................. 108

Low fuel ................................... 108

Immobiliser .............................. 109

Exterior light ............................ 109

High beam ............................... 109

High beam assist ..................... 109

LED headlights ........................ 109

Front fog lights ......................... 109

Rear fog light ........................... 109

Cruise control .......................... 109

Adaptive cruise control ............ 109

Vehicle detected ahead ........... 110

Pedestrian detection ................ 110

Speed limiter ........................... 110

Traffic sign assistant ................ 110

Door open ................................ 110

Displays ..................................... 110

Driver Information Centre ........ 110

Info Display .............................. 116

Head-up display ...................... 117

Vehicle messages ...................... 121

Warning chimes ....................... 121

Vehicle personalisation .............. 122

Telematics service ..................... 126

Emergency call ........................ 126

88 Instruments and controls

Controls

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,

then engage lever and ensure it is

fully locked.

Do not adjust steering wheel unless

vehicle is stationary and steering

wheel lock has been released.

Steering wheel controls

Cruise control and speed limiter are

operated via the controls on the left

side of the steering wheel.

Additionally, forward collision alert

can be set by using the controls on the

left side of the steering wheel.

Infotainment system can be operated

via the controls on the right side of the

steering wheel.

Driver assistance systems 3 177.

Further information is available in the

Infotainment manual.

Driver Information Centre 3 110.

Heated steering wheel

Activate heating by pressing *.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button.

Heating is operational when the

engine is running and during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Instruments and controls 89

Horn

Press j.

Windscreen wiper and

washer

Windscreen wiper with adjustable

wiper interval

HI : fast

LO : slow

INT : interval wiping

OFF : off

For a single wipe when the

windscreen wiper is off, press the

lever downwards to position 1x.

Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable wiper interval

Wiper lever in position INT.

Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust the

wiping frequency.

90 Instruments and controls

Windscreen wiper with rain

sensor

HI : fast

LO : slow

AUTO : automatic wiping with rain

sensor

OFF : off

In AUTO position, the rain sensor

detects the amount of water on the

windscreen and automatically

regulates the frequency of the

windscreen wiper.

For a single wipe when the

windscreen wiper is off, press the

lever downwards to position 1x.

Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Wiper lever in position AUTO.

Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust the

sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Keep the sensor free from dust, dirt

and ice.

Rain sensor function can be activated

or deactivated in the Vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Instruments and controls 91

Windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayed

onto the windscreen and the wiper

wipes a few times.

Washer fluid 3 233.

Rear window wiper and

washer

Rear window wiper

OFF : off

INT : intermittent operation

ON : continuous operation

Do not use if the rear window is

frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

The rear window wiper comes on

automatically when the windscreen

wiper is switched on and reverse gear

is engaged.

Activation or deactivation of this

function can be changed in the menu

Settings in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Rear window washer

Push lever.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the rear

window and the wiper wipes a few

times.

The rear window washer system is

deactivated when the fluid level is

low.

Washer fluid 3 233.

92 Instruments and controls

Outside temperature

A drop in temperature is indicated

immediately and a rise in temperature

after a time delay.

Illustration shows an example.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,

a warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

9Warning

The road surface may already be

icy even though the display

indicates a few degrees above 0

°C.

Clock

Date and time are shown in the Info

Display 3 116.

Multimedia Navi

Press ; and then select Settings.

Select Time and Date to display the

respective submenu.

Set Time Format

To select the desired time format,

touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date Format

To select the desired date format,

select Set Date Format and choose

between the available options in the

submenu.

Instruments and controls 93

Auto Set

To choose whether time and date are

to be set automatically or manually,

select Auto Set.

For time and date to be set

automatically, select On - RDS.

For time and date to be set manually,

select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is set

to Off - Manual, the submenu items

Set Time and Set Date become

available.

Set time and date

To adjust the time and date settings,

select Set Time or Set Date.

Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Press ! and select Settings.

Select Time/Date.

Time zone, time and date are

provided automatically by default.

All values can be set manually, as

well. Therefore, the automatic set

functions have to be deactivated by

toggeling switch icons beside

Automatic Time and Date and

Automatic Time Zone to "O".

Set time or date

Select Set Time or Set Date to enter

the respective submenu. Adjust

values by touching n or o.

Press O to leave the submenu and

store the new value. Press "x" to

leave without storing.

Set time zone

Select Select Time Zone to enter the

respective submenu. Browse through

list by touching n or o. Select

desired time zone by touching list

entry.

Press O to leave the submenu and

store the new value. Press "x" to

leave without storing.

Set time format

By default, the time is displayed in 24-

hour format. To set 12-hour format,

toggle switch icon beside 24-hour

Format to "O".

Power outlets

A 12 V power outlet is located in the

centre console. With ignition off, this

power outlet is deactivated.

94 Instruments and controls

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer: A

12 V power outlet is located at the left

sidewall in the load compartment.

With ignition off, this power outlet

remains active.

Do not exceed the maximum power

consumption of 120 W.

Electrical accessories that are

connected must comply with the

electromagnetic compatibility

requirements laid down in

DIN VDE 40 839.

Do not connect any current-delivering

accessories, e.g. electrical charging

devices or batteries.

Do not damage the outlets by using

unsuitable plugs.

Stop-start system 3 156.

USB port

Two USB ports for charging devices

are located below the foldable

armrest. These ports have also a data

connection to the Infotainment

system.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

USB charging port

Two USB ports for charging devices

only are located in the back of the

centre console.

Notice

The sockets must always be kept

clean and dry.

Inductive charging

9Warning

Inductive charging can affect the

operation of implanted

pacemakers or other medical

Instruments and controls 95

devices. If applicable, seek

medical advice before using the

inductive charging device.

9Warning

Remove any metal objects from

the charging device before

charging a mobile device, as these

objects could become very hot.

To charge a device, the ignition must

be switched on.

The charging slot is located below the

front armrest.

To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from the

charging slot otherwise the

system may not charge.

2. Insert the mobile device with the

display facing to the rear in the

charging slot. Charging status is

indicated in the Info display 0 and

shows if mobile device is properly

positioned.

If 0 is not displayed, remove mobile

device from the slot. Turn mobile

device 180 degrees and wait three

seconds before inserting mobile

device again.

PMA, Qi and A4WP compatible

mobile devices can be charged

inductively.

On some mobile devices, a back

cover with an integrated coil or a

jacket may be required to use

inductive charging.

The mobile device must be smaller

than 8 cm in width and 15 cm in length

to fit into the charging device.

Protective cover for the mobile device

could have impact on the inductive

charging.

Ashtrays

Caution

To be used only for ash and not for

combustible rubbish.

A portable ashtray can be placed in

the cupholders.

96 Instruments and controls

Warning lights, gauges

and indicators

Instrument cluster

Depending on the version, two

instrument clusters are available:

● Baselevel

● Uplevel

Uplevel instrument cluster can be

displayed as Sport mode or Tour

mode.

Instruments and controls 97

Baselevel instrument cluster

98 Instruments and controls

Uplevel instrument cluster, Sport mode

Instruments and controls 99

Uplevel instrument cluster, Touring mode

100 Instruments and controls

Overview

OTurn lights 3 104

XSeat belt reminder 3 104

vAirbag and belt tensioners

3 105

VAirbag deactivation 3 105

pCharging system 3 105

ZMalfunction indicator light

3 105

RBrake and clutch system 3 106

mElectric parking brake 3 106

jElectric parking brake fault

3 106

uAntilock brake system (ABS)

3 106

RGear shifting 3 107

EFollowing distance 3 107

aLane keep assist 3 107

nElectronic Stability Control off

3 107

bElectronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system 3 107

kTraction Control system off

3 107

WEngine coolant temperature

3 107

!Preheating 3 108

uAdBlue 3 108

wTyre pressure monitoring

system 3 108

IEngine oil pressure 3 108

YLow fuel 3 108

dImmobiliser 3 109

8Exterior light 3 109

CHigh beam 3 109

fHigh beam assist 3 109

fLED headlights 3 109

>Front fog lights 3 109

rRear fog light 3 109

mCruise control 3 109

CAdaptive cruise control 3 109

AVehicle detected ahead 3 110

7Pedestrian detected ahead

3 110

LSpeed limiter 3 110

LTraffic sign assistant 3 110

hDoor open 3 110

Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

Instruments and controls 101

Odometer

The total recorded distance is

displayed in miles.

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the last

reset is displayed on the trip computer

page.

Trip odometer counts up to

9,999 miles and then restarts at 0.

Two trip odometer pages are

selectable for different trips.

Baselevel instrument cluster

Select ; on main menu. Choose

page Trip 1 or Trip 2 by pressing P

or N on the steering wheel.

Each trip odometer can be reset

separately when ignition is on: select

respective page, press Å on the

steering wheel. Confirm by choosing

Yes: when the confirmation message

is displayed.

Uplevel instrument cluster

Select Info page on main menu.

Choose page Trip A or Trip B by

pressing P or N on the steering

wheel.

Each trip odometer can be reset

separately when ignition is on: select

respective page, press >. Confirm

reset by pressing Å.

102 Instruments and controls

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed.

Drive in a low engine speed range for

each gear as much as possible.

Caution

If the needle is in the red warning

zone, the maximum permitted

engine speed is exceeded. Engine

at risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level.

The arrow indicates the vehicle side

where the fuel filler flap is located.

Control indicator r illuminates if the

level in the tank is low. Refuel

immediately if rflashes.

Never run the fuel tank dry.

Because of the fuel remaining in the

tank, the top-up quantity may be less

than the specified fuel tank capacity.

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

Displays the coolant temperature.

50° : engine operating

temperature not yet

reached

90°

(central

area)

: normal operating

temperature

130° : temperature too high

Instruments and controls 103

Caution

If engine coolant temperature is

too high, stop vehicle, switch off

engine. Danger to engine. Check

coolant level.

Service display

The engine oil life system informs

when to change the engine oil and

filter. Based on driving conditions, the

interval at which an engine oil and

filter change will be indicated can vary

considerably.

When the system has calculated that

engine oil life has been diminished,

Change Engine Oil Soon appears in

the Driver Information Centre. Have

engine oil and filter changed by a

workshop within one week or

300 miles, whichever occurs first.

This can be an additional engine oil

and filter change or part of a regular

service.

The remaining oil life duration menu

is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre 3 110.

Select Info, " or ? Menu by

pressing è on steering wheel. Press

å to select Oil Life page.

Remaining oil life duration is indicated

in percentage.

Reset

On Baselevel display press

SET/CLR on turn signal lever for

several seconds to reset. The ignition

must be switched on but engine not

running.

On Uplevel display press é on

steering wheel to open the subfolder.

Select Reset and confirm by pressing

Å. The ignition must be switched on

but engine not running.

The system must be reset every time

the engine oil is changed to allow

proper functionality. Seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Next service

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre, when

maintenance of the vehicle is

required. Have maintenance work

104 Instruments and controls

carried out by a workshop within one

week or 300 miles, whichever occurs

first.

Service information 3 276.

Control indicators

The control indicators described are

not present in all vehicles. The

description applies to all instrument

versions. Depending on the

equipment, the position of the control

indicators may vary. When the

ignition is switched on, most control

indicators will illuminate briefly as a

functionality test.

The control indicator colours mean:

red : danger, important reminder

yellow : warning, information, fault

green : confirmation of activation

blue : confirmation of activation

white : confirmation of activation

See all control indicators on different

instrument clusters 3 96.

Turn lights

O illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates briefly

The parking lights are switched on.

Flashes

A turn light or the hazard warning

flashers are activated.

Rapid flashing: failure of a turn light or

associated fuse, failure of turn light on

trailer.

Bulb replacement 3 237.

Fuses 3 247.

Turn lights 3 134.

Seat belt reminder

Seat belt reminder on front seats

X for driver seat illuminates or flashes

red in the instrument cluster.

k for front passenger seat illuminates

or flashes red in the roof console,

when seat is occupied.

Illuminates

After the ignition has been switched

on until the seat belt has been

fastened.

Flashes

After having started the engine for a

maximum of 100 seconds until the

seat belt has been fastened.

Seat belt status on rear seats

X or > illuminates or flashes white (in

Baselevel Driver Information Centre)

or red (in Uplevel Driver Information

Centre).

X illuminates

During 60 seconds after ignition has

been switched on: seat belt is

unfastened.

> illuminates

During 60 seconds after ignition has

been switched on: seat belt has been

fastened. After this time, indicators of

Instruments and controls 105

seats with fastened belts or

unchanged belt status show >

symbol.

X illuminates or flashes

Fastened seat belt has been

unfastened.

No indication

All rear seat belts are fastened before

ignition has been turned on.

Fastening the seat belt 3 57.

Airbag and belt tensioners

v illuminates red.

When the ignition is switched on, the

control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not

illuminate, does not go out after

4 seconds or illuminates whilst

driving, there is a fault in the airbag

system. Seek the assistance of a

workshop. The airbags and belt

pretensioners may fail to trigger in the

event of an accident.

Deployment of the belt pretensioners

or airbags is indicated by continuous

illumination of v.

9Warning

Have the cause of the fault

remedied immediately by a

workshop.

Belt pretensioners 3 56.

Airbag system 3 58.

Airbag deactivation

V illuminates yellow.

The front passenger airbag is

activated.

* illuminates yellow.

The front passenger airbag is

deactivated.

Airbag deactivation 3 63.

Charging system

p illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Stop, switch off engine. Vehicle

battery is not charging. Engine

cooling may be interrupted. The

brake servo unit may cease to be

effective. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Malfunction indicator light

Z illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Fault in the emission control system.

The permitted emission limits may be

exceeded.

106 Instruments and controls

The cleaning process of the exhaust

filter is potentially not possible.

Seek the assistance of a workshop

immediately.

Flashes when the engine is

running

Fault that could lead to catalytic

converter damage. Ease up on the

accelerator until the flashing stops.

Seek the assistance of a workshop

immediately.

Brake and clutch system

R illuminates red.

The brake and clutch fluid level is too

low.

9Warning

Stop. Do not continue your

journey. Consult a workshop.

Electric parking brake

m illuminates or flashes red.

Illuminates

Electric parking brake is applied

3 170.

Flashes

Electric parking brake is not fully

applied or released. Depress the

brake pedal and attempt to reset the

system by first releasing then

applying the electric parking brake. If

m remains flashing, do not drive and

seek the assistance of a workshop.

Electric parking brake fault

j illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Electric parking brake is operating

with degraded performance 3 170.

Flashes

Electric parking brake is in service

mode. Stop vehicle, apply and

release the electric parking brake to

reset.

9Warning

Have the cause of the fault

remedied immediately by a

workshop. Avoid parking on

inclines until the cause of the fault

has been remedied.

Antilock brake system

(ABS)

u illuminates yellow.

Illuminates for a few seconds after the

ignition is switched on. The system is

ready for operation when the control

indicator extinguishes.

If the control indicator does not go out

after a few seconds, or if it illuminates

while driving, there is a fault in the

ABS. The brake system remains

operational but without ABS

regulation.

Antilock brake system 3 169.

Instruments and controls 107

Gear shifting

R or S with the number of a higher or

lower gear is indicated, when up- or

downshifting is recommended for fuel

saving reasons.

Following distance

E indicates the alert sensitivity

setting of the forward collision alert,

using filled distance bars.

Forward collision alert 3 189.

Lane keep assist

a illuminates green or yellow, or

flashes yellow.

Illuminates green

The system is switched on and ready

to operate.

Illuminates yellow

The system approaches a detected

lane marking without using the turn

light in that direction.

Flashes yellow

The system recognizes that the lane

is departed significantly.

Lane keep assist 3 217.

Electronic Stability Control

off

t illuminates yellow.

The system is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Control

and Traction Control system

b illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

A fault in the system is present.

Continued driving is possible. Driving

stability, however, may deteriorate

depending on road surface

conditions.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Flashes

The system is actively engaged.

Engine output may be reduced and

the vehicle may be braked

automatically to a small degree.

Electronic Stability Control 3 174.

Traction Control system 3 173.

Traction Control system off

k illuminates yellow.

The system is deactivated.

Engine coolant temperature

W illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Stop, switch off engine.

Caution

Coolant temperature too high.

Check coolant level immediately

3 232.

108 Instruments and controls

If there is sufficient coolant, consult a

workshop.

Preheating

! illuminates yellow.

Preheating of Diesel engine is

activated. Only activates when

outside temperature is low. Start the

engine when control indicator

extinguishes.

AdBlue

Y flashes yellow.

AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBlue

soon to avoid prevention of the

engine start.

AdBlue 3 161.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system

w illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Tyre pressure loss. Stop immediately

and check tyre pressure.

Flashes

Fault in system or tyre without

pressure sensor mounted (e.g. spare

wheel). After 60 to 90 seconds the

control indicator illuminates

continuously. Consult a workshop.

Engine oil pressure

I illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is

switched on and extinguishes shortly

after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is

running

Caution

Engine lubrication may be

interrupted. This may result in

damage to the engine and / or

locking of the drive wheels.

1. Depress clutch.

2. Select neutral gear.

3. Move out of the flow of traffic as

quickly as possible without

impeding other vehicles.

4. Switch off ignition.

9Warning

When the engine is off,

considerably more force is needed

to brake and steer.

During an Autostop, the brake

servo unit will still be operational.

Do not remove key until vehicle is

stationary, otherwise the steering

wheel lock could engage

unexpectedly.

Keep engine turned off and let the

vehicle be towed to a workshop.

Low fuel

Y illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Level in fuel tank is too low.

Instruments and controls 109

Flashes

Fuel used up. Refuel immediately.

Never run the tank dry.

Refuelling 3 222.

Catalytic converter 3 161.

Bleeding the diesel fuel system

3 236.

Immobiliser

d flashes yellow.

Fault in the immobiliser system. The

engine cannot be started.

Immobiliser 3 37.

Exterior light

8 illuminates green.

The exterior lights are on 3 128.

High beam

C illuminates blue.

Illuminated when high beam is on or

during headlight flash 3 129.

High beam assist

f illuminates green.

The high beam assist is activated

3 129.

LED headlights

f illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Fault in the system.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Flashes

System is switched to symmetrical

low beam.

Control indicator f flashes for approx.

4 seconds after the ignition is

switched on as a reminder for

symmetrical headlight 3 131.

Front fog lights

> illuminates green.

The front fog lights are on 3 134.

Rear fog light

ø illuminates yellow.

The rear fog light is on 3 134.

Cruise control

m illuminates white or green.

Illuminates white

The system is on.

Illuminates green

Cruise control is active. Set speed is

indicated in the Driver Information

Centre.

Cruise control 3 177.

Adaptive cruise control

C illuminates in the Driver

Information Centre.

C illuminates white

The system is on.

C illuminates green

Adaptive cruise control is active.

110 Instruments and controls

Adaptive cruise control 3 180.

Vehicle detected ahead

A illuminates green or yellow.

Illuminates green

A vehicle ahead is detected in the

same lane.

Illuminates yellow

The distance to a preceding moving

vehicle gets too small or when

approaching another vehicle too

rapidly.

Adaptive cruise control 3 180.

Forward collision alert 3 189.

Pedestrian detection

7 illuminates yellow.

A pedestrian ahead is detected.

Speed limiter

L illuminates white or green.

Illuminates white

The system is on.

Illuminates green

Speed limiter is active. Set speed is

indicated near L symbol.

Speed limiter 3 179.

Traffic sign assistant

L displays detected traffic signs as

control indicator.

Traffic sign assistant 3 213.

Door open

h illuminates red.

A door or the tailgate is open.

Displays

Driver Information Centre

The Driver Information Centre is

located in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the version and the

instrument cluster, the Driver

Information Centre is available as

Baselevel display or Uplevel display.

Driver Information Centre indicates

depending on the equipment:

● overall and trip odometer

● vehicle information

● trip/fuel information

● driving economy information

● vehicle and warning messages

● audio and infotainment

information

● phone information

● navigation information

● vehicle settings

Instruments and controls 111

Baselevel display

Selecting menus and functions

Steering wheel controls

The menus and functions can be

selected via the buttons on the right

side of the steering wheel.

Press è or é to switch between the

main menus or to return from a

submenu to the next higher menu

level.

Press å or ä to browse through

submenu pages of the currently

selected main menu entry. Use these

buttons also to alter a numeric value.

Press Å to select a function or check

a box in a dialogue.

Vehicle and service messages are

popped-up in the Driver Information

Centre if required. Confirm messages

by pressing Å.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Main menu

Main menus are:

● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by ;.

● Vehicle information, displayed

by ?.

● Eco information, displayed by

Some of the displayed functions differ

when the vehicle is being driven or at

a standstill and some functions are

only active when the vehicle is being

driven.

Uplevel display

112 Instruments and controls

Selecting menus and functions

The menus and functions can be

selected via the buttons on the right

side of the steering wheel.

Press è to open main menu page.

Browse through main menu by

pressing è or é.

Confirm a main menu page with Å.

Press å or ä to browse through

submenu pages of the currently

selected main menu entry. Use these

buttons also to alter a numeric value.

Press Å to select a function or check

a box in a dialogue.

Vehicle and service messages are

popped-up in the Driver Information

Centre if required. Confirm messages

by pressing Å.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Main menu

Main menus are:

● Trip / fuel information, displayed

by Info.

● Audio information, displayed by

Audio.

● Navigation information,

displayed by Navigation.

● Phone information, displayed by

Phone.

● Vehicle information, displayed by

Options.

Some of the displayed functions differ

when the vehicle is being driven or at

a standstill and some functions are

only active when the vehicle is being

driven.

Uplevel instrument cluster can be

displayed as Sport mode or Tour

mode. See Options menu, Display.

Info Menu, ; or "

The following list contains all possible

Info Menu pages. Some may not be

available for your particular vehicle.

Depending on the display some

functions are symbolised.

●Speed

●Trip 1 / Trip A, containing:

Distance

Fuel Economy / Average Fuel

Economy

Average Speed

●Trip 2 / Trip B, containing:

Distance

Fuel Economy / Average Fuel

Economy

Average Speed

●Fuel / Fuel Information,

containing:

Fuel Range

Instant Fuel Economy

●Oil Life

●Tyre Pressure

●Timer

●Traffic Sign Memory

Instruments and controls 113

●Following Distance

●Driver Assistance

●Top Consumers

●Economy Trend

●ECO Index

●AdBlue Level

On Baselevel display, the pages Oil

Life, Tyre Pressure, Following

Distance, Traffic Sign Memory,

AdBlue Level, Tyre Load and Speed

Warning are displayed in the Vehicle

information menu, select ?.

Speed

Digital display of the instantaneous

speed.

Trip 1/A or 2/B

Two independent pages 1/A and 2/B

display the current distance, average

fuel consumption and average speed

since a certain reset.

The distance indicator counts up to a

distance of 9,999 miles then restarts

at 0.

To reset on Baselevel, press Å and

confirm reset. On Uplevel display,

press é and confirm with Å. This

only resets the values on the current

displayed page. The other Trip page

stays unaffected.

Fuel /Fuel Information

Fuel Range

Range is calculated from current fuel

tank level and current consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the range is updated

automatically after a brief delay.

When the fuel level in the tank is low,

a message appears on the display

and control indicator Y in the fuel

gauge illuminates.

When the tank must be refuelled

immediately, a warning message

appears and remains on the display.

Additionally, control indicator Y in the

fuel gauge flashes 3 108.

Instant Fuel Economy

Display of the instantaneous

consumption.

Oil Life

Indicates an estimate of the oil's

useful life. The number in % means

the remaining of current oil life 3 103.

Tyre Pressure

Checks tyre pressure of all wheels

during driving 3 255.

Timer

Baselevel display: start and stop

timer with Å. To reset, hold Å when

timer is not running.

Uplevel display: To start or stop timer,

press Å and Å again. To reset,

press Å, choose Reset and confirm

with Å.

Traffic Sign Memory

Displays the detected traffic signs for

the current route section 3 213.

Following Distance

Displays the distance in seconds to a

preceding moving vehicle 3 192. If

Adaptive cruise control is active this

page shows the following distance

setting instead.

Driver Assistance

Displays the status of several driver

assistance systems:

Adaptive cruise control 3 180.

Forward collision alert 3 189.

114 Instruments and controls

Lane keep assist 3 217.

AdBlue Level

Displays the level of the AdBlue tank

3 161.

Eco information menu, @

●Top Consumers

●Economy Trend

●ECO Index

On Uplevel display the pages Top

Consumers, Economy Trend and

ECO Index are displayed in the Info

Menu, see above.

Top Consumers

List of top comfort consumers

currently switched on is displayed in

descending order. Fuel saving

potential is indicated.

During sporadic driving conditions,

the engine will activate the heated

rear window automatically to increase

the engine load. In this event, the

heated rear window is indicated as

one of the top consumers, without

activation by the driver.

Economy Trend

Displays the average consumption

development over a distance of

31 miles. Filled segments display the

consumption in 3.1 mile steps and

show the effect of topography or

driving behaviour on fuel

consumption.

ECO Index

The average fuel consumption is

indicated on an economic scale. For

economical driving, adapt driving

style to keep the indicator within the

green area. The more the indicator

moves towards red, the higher is the

fuel consumption. Simultaneously the

average consumption value is

indicated.

Depending on vehicle version, the

Eco Index shows values referring to

trip odometer page A/1 or the current

driving cycle. In the last case, the

indicator is reset when ignition is

switched on the next time.

Audio menu G

Enables browsing for music, selecting

from favourites or changing the audio

source.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Phone menu $

Enables managing and performing of

phone calls, scrolling through

contacts or operating hands-free

phoning.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Navigation menu §

Enables route guidance.

Instruments and controls 115

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Vehicle information menu, ?,

Options or %

The following list contains all possible

Options Menu pages. Some may not

be available for your particular

vehicle. Depending on the display

some functions are symbolised.

●Units

●Display

●Info Page Options

●Home Page Options

●Adaptive Cruise

●Speed Warning

●Tyre Load

●Gauges

●Software Information

●Head-up Display

●AdBlue Level

Units

Select display unit system: imperial or

metric.

Display

Press é and select Sport or Touring

mode. Sport mode includes more

vehicle information, Tour mode

includes more media information.

This setting is only available with

Uplevel display.

Info Page Options

A list of all pages in the Info Menu is

displayed, see above. Select the

pages to be displayed in the Info

Menu. Selected pages have a 0.

Non viewable functions have a blank

checkbox.

Home Page Options

Select, which values are shown on

the Driver Information Center home

page, e.g. speed or fuel range.

Adaptive Cruise

Activates or deactivates adaptive

cruise control 3 180.

Speed Warning

The speed warning page allows you

to set a speed that you do not want to

exceed.

Speed limit can only be set when

speed warning is enabled. Once the

speed is set, this feature can be

turned off by pressing Å while

viewing this page. If the selected

speed limit is exceeded, a pop-up

warning is displayed with a chime.

Tyre Load

The tyre pressure category according

to the actual tyre inflation pressure

can be selected 3 255.

Gauges

●Oil Temperature

Displays engine oil temperature

in degrees Celsius.

116 Instruments and controls

●Battery Voltage

Displays the vehicle battery

voltage. During engine running

voltage can vary between 12 V

and 15.5 V. Temporary voltage

below 12 V is possible when high

electrical load is used.

●Engine Boost

Displays the engine turbocharger

boost pressure in %.

●AdBlue

Displays the level of the Adblue

tank 3 161.

●IFE-AFE

Displays both instantaneous and

average fuel economy.

●Fuel Range

Displays average remaining

distance with remaining fuel in

the tank.

●Blank Page

Displays a blank gauge.

Software information

Displays the open source software

information.

Head-Up Display

Allows rotation of the head-up display

projection 3 117.

Info Display

The Info Display is located in the

instrument panel near the instrument

cluster.

Depending on the vehicle

configuration the vehicle is equipped

with one of the following infotainment

systems:

●Multimedia

●Multimedia Navi

●Multimedia Navi Pro

The Info Display can indicate:

● time 3 92

● outside temperature 3 92

● date 3 92

● Infotainment system

● climate control settings 3 142

● rear view camera 3 210

● panoramic view system 3 208

● parking assist instructions

3 198

● rear cross traffic 3 212

● Flex Ride visualisation menu

3 175

● navigation

● system messages

● settings for vehicle

personalisation 3 122

Multimedia Navi

Selecting menus and settings

Menus and settings are accessed via

the display.

Instruments and controls 117

Press X to switch on the display.

Press ; to display the homepage.

Touch required menu display icon

with the finger.

Touch a respective icon to confirm a

selection.

Touch 9 to return to the next higher

menu level.

Press ; to return to the homepage.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Selecting menus and settings

There are three options to operate the

display:

● via buttons below the display

● by touching the touchscreen with

the finger

● via speech recognition

Button operation

Press X to switch on the display.

Press ; to display the homepage.

Press BACK to exit a menu without

changing a setting.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Touchscreen operation

Display must be switched on by

pressing X. Touch ; to select

homepage.

Touch required menu display icon or

select a function with the finger.

Scroll a longer submenu list with the

finger up or down.

Confirm a required function or

selection by touching.

Touch O to exit a menu with saving of

the changed setting.

Touch icon & to leave a menu

without saving.

Touch ; to return to the homepage.

For further information, see

Infotainment manual.

Speech recognition

Description see Infotainment manual.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Valet mode

If activated, some functions of the

Driver Information Centre and the Info

Display are limited. The load

compartment is being locked and

cannot be unlocked.

Head-up display

The head-up display shows driver

information concerning the

instrument cluster onto the

windscreen on the driver's side.

118 Instruments and controls

The information appears as an image

projected from a lense in the

instrument panel onto the windscreen

directly ahead in driver's view. The

image appears focused out toward

the front of the vehicle.

Depending on the equipment head-

up display can indicate:

● general driving information

● alerts from driver assistance

systems

● automatic transmission selector

lever position

● gear shift indication

● audio / phone information

● turn-by-turn navigation

information if equipped with

navigation Infotainment.

There are three controls above the

light switch to operate the head-up

display.

Switching on

Lift up button & briefly.

Display views

Different views are selectable in the

head-up display by pressing /

button. Each press will change the

display view.

Speed view

Indicates

● speedometer: digital indication of

speed

● traffic signs: indication of speed

limits

Performance View

Indicates

● speedometer: digital indication of

speed

● tachometer: engine speed in

round per minute

Instruments and controls 119

● automatic transmission: selector

lever position

● manual / automatic transmission:

gear shift indication

Audio view

Indicates

● speedometer: digital indication of

speed

● actual audio playing information

Navigation view

Indicates

● speedometer: digital indication of

speed

● turn-by-turn navigation

information

Active safety control indicators

On all views control indicators of

following Driver assistance systems

are indicated in the top line of the

display

● vehicle detected ahead A:

vehicle recognition

● lane keep assist a: status and

warning

● adaptive cruise control Õ: set

speed and status

● pedestrian detected ahead 7:

pedestrian recognition

Pop-up alerts

The following list contains just an

extract of possible alerts. Some may

not be available for your particular

vehicle, others can appear depending

on vehicle configuration.

Alerts pop-up on each page if

required

● pedestrian protection alert

● forward collision alert

● up-/downshift alert

● incoming call

Alerts with lower priority can be reset

by pressing G, high priority alerts

appear as long as danger continues.

System messages or vehicle

warnings may require immediately

action. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Adjust position of head-up display

image

1. Adjust the driver's seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Press down or lift up button . to

centre the image. It can only be

adjusted up and down, not side to

side.

9Warning

If the head-up display image is too

bright or too high in your field of

view, it may obstruct your view

when it is dark outside. Be sure to

keep the head-up display image

dim and placed low in your field of

view.

Adjust brightness

The head-up display image will

automatically dim and brighten to

compensate for outside lighting.

Brightness can also be adjusted

manually as needed:

Lift up & and hold to brighten the

display. Press down and hold to dim

the display.

120 Instruments and controls

The image can temporarily light up

depending on angel and position of

sunlight.

Adjust rotation

Select Options/% in the Driver

Information Center main menu.

Select submenu page

Head-Up Display. Press é on the

steering wheel to open adjustment

dialogue. Press ä or å to turn

projection clockwise or counter-

clockwise. Press è to leave

adjustment dialogue.

Switching off

Hold down & to turn the head-up

display off.

Language

Preferred language can be set in

vehicle personalisation menu 3 122.

Units

Units can be changed in the settings

menu of the Driver Information Centre

3 110.

Care of head-up display

Clean the inside of the windscreen as

needed to remove any dirt or film that

could reduce the sharpness or clarity

of the head-up image.

Clean the head-up display lens in the

instrument panel with a soft cloth

sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the

lens gently, then dry it.

System limitations

Head-up display may not operate

properly when:

● The lens in the instrument panel

is covered by objects or

windscreen and lens are not

clean.

● Display brightness is too dim or

bright.

● Image is not adjusted to the

proper height.

● The driver wears polarised

sunglasses.

If the head-up image is not correct for

other reasons, contact a workshop.

The windscreen is part of the head-up

display system.

Windscreen replacement 3 40.

Instruments and controls 121

Vehicle messages

Messages are indicated in the Driver

Information Centre, in some cases

together with a warning chime.

Press Å to confirm a message.

Vehicle and service messages

The vehicle messages are displayed

as text. Follow the instructions given

in the messages.

Messages in the Info Display

Some important messages may

appear additionally in the Info

Display. Some messages only pop-

up for a few seconds.

Warning chimes

If several warnings appear at the

same time, only one warning chime

will sound.

When starting the engine or whilst

driving

The warning chime regarding not

fastened seat belts has priority over

any other warning chime.

● If seat belt is not fastened.

● If a door or the tailgate is not fully

closed when starting off.

● If a certain speed is exceeded

with parking brake applied.

● If adaptive cruise control

deactivates automatically.

● If approaching a vehicle ahead

too closely.

● If approaching a pedestrian

ahead too closely.

● If a programmed speed or speed

limit is exceeded.

● If a warning message appears in

the Driver Information Centre.

● If the electronic key is not in the

passenger compartment.

● If the parking assist detects an

object.

● If an unintended lane change

occurs.

● If the exhaust filter has reached

the maximum filling level.

When the vehicle is parked and/or

the driver's door is opened

● With exterior lights on.

● If the trailer hitch is not engaged.

During an Autostop

● If the driver's door is opened.

● If any condition for an Autostop is

not fulfilled.

122 Instruments and controls

Vehicle personalisation

The vehicle's behaviour can be

personalised by changing the settings

in the Info Display.

Some of the personal settings for

different drivers can be memorised

individually for each vehicle key.

Memorised settings 3 25.

Depending on vehicle equipment and

country-specific regulations some of

the functions described below may

not be available.

Some functions are only displayed or

active when the engine is running.

Personal settings

Multimedia Navi

Press ;, select Settings and then

Vehicle on the touch-screen.

In the corresponding submenus the

following settings can be changed:

Vehicle

●Climate & Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifies

the level of the cabin airflow of the

climate control in automatic

mode.

Auto Heated Seats:

Automatically activates the seat

heating.

Auto Defog: Supports

windscreen dehumidification by

automatically selecting the

necessary settings and

automatic air conditioning mode.

Auto Rear Defog: Automatically

activates heated rear window.

●Collision / Detection Systems

Rear View Camera Guidelines:

Activates or deactivates the rear

view camera guidelines on the

Info Display.

Forward Collision Alert: Activates

or deactivates forward collision

alert.

Auto Collision Preparation:

Activates or deactivates the

automatic brake functionality of

the vehicle in the event of

imminent collision danger. The

following is selectable: the

system will take over brake

control, warn by chimes only or is

deactivated completely.

Forward Collision System:

Activates or deactivates warning

chimes or automatic brake

functionality in the event of

imminent collision danger.

Front pedestrian detection:

Activates or deactivates warning

chimes or automatic brake

Instruments and controls 123

functionality of the pedestrian

detection system.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert:

Activates or deactivates rear

cross traffic alert.

Park Assist: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist.

Activation is selectable with or

without attached trailer coupling.

Go Notifier: Activates or

deactivates the reminder

message to drive off when the

adaptive cruise control holds the

vehicle at standstill.

Side Blind Zone Alert: Activates

or deactivates side blind zone

alert.

●Comfort and Convenience

Auto Memory Recall: Changes

the settings to the recall of

memorised settings for power

seat adjustment.

Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activates

or deactivates easy exit function

of the power seat.

Chime Volume: Changes the

volume of warning chimes.

Reverse Tilt Mirror: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist

function of the exterior mirrors.

Auto Mirror Folding: Activates or

deactivates folding of the exterior

mirrors with the remote control.

Personalization By Driver:

Activates or deactivates the

personalisation function.

Rain Sense Wipers: Activates or

deactivates automatic wiping

with rain sensor.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:

Activates or deactivates

automatic switching on of the

rear window wiper when reverse

gear is engaged.

Extended Hill Start Assist:

Toggles between hill start assist

and extended hold hill start assist

●Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights: Activates

or deactivates the entry lighting.

Exit Lighting: Activates or

deactivates and changes the

duration of exit lighting.

Left or Right Hand Traffic:

Changes between lighting for left

or right-hand traffic.

Adaptive Forward Lighting:

Changes the settings of the

functions of the LED headlights.

●Power Door Locks

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out:

Activates or deactivates the door

locking function while a door is

open.

Auto Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the automatic door

locking function after switching

on ignition.

Delayed Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the delayed door

locking function. This feature

delays the actual locking of the

doors until all doors are closed.

●Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Remote Unlock Light Feedback:

Activates or deactivates the

hazard warning flasher feedback

whilst unlocking.

Remote Lock Feedback:

Changes what kind of feedback

is given when locking the vehicle.

124 Instruments and controls

Remote Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Relock Remotely Unlocked

Doors: Activates or deactivates

the automatic relock function

after unlocking without opening

the vehicle.

Remote Window Operation:

Activates or deactivates the

operation of power windows with

electronic key.

Passive Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Passive Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the passive locking

function. This feature locks the

vehicle automatically after

several seconds if all doors have

been closed and an electronic

key has been removed from the

vehicle.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:

Activates or deactivates the

warning chime when the

electronic key remains in the

vehicle.

Personal settings

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Press ;, then select the % icon.

The Settings menu contains the

following submenus, which can be

selected in the upper menu bar:

●System

●Apps

●Vehicle

●Personal

System

To change Time/Date, see Clock

3 92.

Select Language to open a list of

available languages for the Info

Display and Driver Information

Center. Select desired language.

Apps

See infotainment manual.

Vehicle

●Sport Mode Custom. / Auto Mode

Customisation

Changes the settings of the

Interactive driving system modes

3 175.

●Climate and Air Quality

Auto Fan Speed: Modifies the

level of the cabin airflow of the

climate control in automatic

mode.

Auto heated seats: Automatically

activates the seat heating.

Auto Demist: Supports

windscreen dehumidification by

automatically selecting the

Instruments and controls 125

necessary settings and

automatic air conditioning mode.

Auto Rear Demist: Automatically

activates heated rear window.

●Collision/Detection Systems

Forward Collision System:

Deactivates the system

completely, activates warning

chimes only or warning chimes in

combination with automatic

brake functionality.

Front Pedestrian Detection:

Activates warning chimes only or

warning chimes in combination

with automatic brake functionality

or deactivates the system

completely.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier:

Activates or deactivates the

reminder message to drive off

when the adaptive cruise control

holds the vehicle at standstill.

Lane Change Alert: Activates or

deactivates side blind zone alert.

Park Assist: Activates or

deactivates the parking assist.

Activation is selectable with or

without attached trailer coupling.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert:

Activates or deactivates rear

cross traffic alert.

●Comfort and Convenience

Auto Memory Recall: Changes

the settings to the recall of

memorised settings for power

seat adjustment.

Easy Exit Driver's Seat: Activates

or deactivates easy exit function

of the power seat.

Chime Volume: Changes the

volume of warning chimes.

Handsfree Liftgate/Boot Lid

Control: Changes the hands-free

function settings of the power

tailgate.

Reverse Tilt Mirror: Changes the

parking assist function of the

exterior mirrors.

Auto Mirror Folding: Activates or

deactivates folding of the exterior

mirrors with the remote control.

Personalisation by Driver:

Activates or deactivates the

personalisation function,

depending on which key is being

used.

Rain Sense Wipers: Activates or

deactivates automatic wiping

with rain sensor.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:

Activates or deactivates

automatic switching on of the

rear window wiper when reverse

gear is engaged.

Extended Hill Start Assist:

Toggles between hill start assist

and extended hold hill start assist

●Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights: Activates

or deactivates the entry lighting.

Exit Lighting: Activates or

deactivates and changes the

duration of exit lighting.

Left or Right-Hand Traffic:

Changes between lighting for left

or right-hand traffic.

Adaptive Forward Lighting:

Changes the settings of the LED

headlights.

●Power Door Locks

Open Door Anti-Lock Out:

Activates or deactivates the door

126 Instruments and controls

locking function while a door is

open.

Auto Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the automatic door

locking function after switching

on ignition.

Delayed Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the delayed door

locking function. This feature

delays the actual locking of the

doors until all doors are closed.

●Remote Lock, Unlock and Start

Remote Unlock Light Feedback:

Activates or deactivates the

hazard warning flasher feedback

whilst unlocking.

Remote Lock Feedback:

Changes what kind of feedback

is given when locking the vehicle.

Remote Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Relock Doors Unlocked

Remotely: Activates or

deactivates the automatic relock

function after unlocking without

opening the vehicle.

Remote Window Operation:

Activates or deactivates the

operation of power windows with

electronic key.

Passive Door Unlock: Changes

the configuration to unlock only

the driver's door or the whole

vehicle whilst unlocking.

Passive Door Lock: Activates or

deactivates the passive locking

function. This feature locks the

vehicle automatically after

several seconds if all doors have

been closed and an electronic

key has been removed from the

vehicle.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:

Activates or deactivates the

warning chime when the

electronic key remains in the

vehicle.

Personal

See infotainment manual.

Telematics service

Emergency call

Emergency call function

Vehicles featuring the emergency call

function are equipped with a red

SOS button in the overhead console.

The emergency call function will

establish a connection to the nearest

public safety answering point (PSAP).

A minimum set of data including

vehicle and location information will

be sent to the PSAP.

Instruments and controls 127

Notice

Establishing an emergency call may

not be possible in areas without

sufficient network availability or due

to hardware damage during an

accident.

Automatic crash notification

In case of an accident with airbag

deployment, an automatic

emergency call is established and an

automatic crash notification will be

transmitted to the next public safety

answering point.

Emergency assistance

In case of an emergency you can also

manually place an emergency call by

pressing the red SOS button for more

than two seconds. The LED flashes to

confirm that a connection to the

nearest PSAP is being established.

The LED illuminates steadily as long

as the call is active.

Pressing the SOS button immediately

a second time will terminate the call.

The LED switches off.

128 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lighting .......................... 128

Light switch .............................. 128

Automatic light control ............. 129

High beam ............................... 129

High beam assist ..................... 129

Headlight flash ......................... 131

Headlight range adjustment ....131

Headlights when driving

abroad .................................... 131

Daytime running lights ............. 132

LED headlights ........................ 132

Hazard warning flashers .......... 133

Turn lights ................................ 134

Front fog lights ......................... 134

Rear fog light ........................... 134

Parking lights ........................... 135

Reversing lights ....................... 135

Misted light covers ................... 135

Interior lighting ........................... 135

Instrument panel illumination

control ..................................... 135

Interior lights ............................ 136

Reading lights .......................... 136

Sunvisor lights ......................... 137

Lighting features ........................ 137

Centre console lighting ............ 137

Entry lighting ............................ 137

Exit lighting .............................. 137

Battery discharge protection .... 138

Exterior lighting

Light switch

Turn light switch:

AUTO : automatic light control

switches automatically

between daytime running

light and headlight

8: sidelights

9: headlights

When switching on the ignition,

automatic light control is active.

Control indicator 8 3 109.

Lighting 129

Tail lights

Tail lights are illuminated together

with low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light control

function is switched on and the

engine is running, the system

switches between daytime running

lights and headlights automatically

depending on the external lighting

conditions and information given by

the wiper system.

Daytime running light 3 132.

Automatic headlight activation

During poor lighting conditions

headlights are switched on.

Additionally, headlights are switched

on if the windscreen wipers have

been activated for several wipes.

LED headlights 3 132.

Tunnel detection

When a tunnel is entered, headlights

are switched on immediately.

High beam

Push lever to switch from low to high

beam.

Pull lever to deactivate high beam.

High beam assist 3 132.

High beam assist

The camera in the windscreen

detects the lights of oncoming or

preceding vehicles. Once activated,

high beam assist remains active and

switches high beam on and off

automatically. The latest setting of the

high beam assist will remain after the

ignition is switched on again.

It switches automatically to low beam

when:

● Driving in urban areas.

● It is foggy or snowy.

● Front or rear fog lights are

switched on.

If there are no restrictions detected,

the system switches back to high

beam.

130 Lighting

Vehicles without LED matrix

headlights

High beam is switched on

automatically at a speed above

25 mph. High beam is switched off at

a speed below 12 mph, but high beam

assist remains active.

Vehicles with LED matrix

headlights

This feature allows the high beam to

function as main driving light at night.

Each LED on right or left side is

triggered or faded out particularly

according to the traffic situation. This

gives the best light distribution

without dazzling other road users.

High beam is switched on

automatically at a speed above

31 mph. High beam is switched off at

a speed below 22 mph, but high beam

assist remains active.

Motorway mode

High beam assist includes a special

motorway mode. When driving faster

than 62 mph on motorways for a

certain time, the light beam becomes

smaller to avoid dazzling of oncoming

traffic.

Activation

Activate high beam assist by pressing

The green control indicator f

illuminates continuously when the

high beam assist is activated, the blue

one 7 illuminates when high beam is

on.

Control indicator f 3 109, 7

3 109.

Deactivation

With high beam on, pull the indicator

lever once to deactivate high beam

assist. If a headlight flash is activated

when the high beam is off, the high

beam assist will remain activated.

Pushing the indicator lever to activate

manual high beam will deactivate

high beam assist.

Press f once to deactivate high

beam assist.

Lighting 131

Headlight flash

To activate the headlight flash, pull

lever.

Pulling lever deactivates high beam.

LED headlights 3 132.

Headlight range adjustment

Manual headlight range

adjustment

Headlight range can be adjusted

manually if vehicle is equipped with

halogen headlights. LED headlights

are adjusted automatically.

Dynamic automatic headlight

levelling 3 132.

To adapt headlight range to the

vehicle load to prevent dazzling: push

and then turn ? to required position.

0 : front seats occupied

1 : all seats occupied

2 : all seats occupied and load

compartment laden

3 : driver's seat occupied and load

compartment laden

Headlights when driving

abroad

The asymmetrical headlight beam

extends visibility at the edge of the

road at the passenger side.

However, when driving in countries

where traffic drives on the opposite

side of the road, adjust the headlights

to prevent dazzling of oncoming

traffic.

Vehicles with halogen headlight

system

The headlights do not have to be

adjusted.

Vehicles with LED headlight

Headlights can be set for driving on

the opposite side of the road in the

vehicle personalisation menu via the

Info Display.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

132 Lighting

Every time the ignition is switched on,

f flashes for approx. 4 seconds as a

reminder.

To deactivate, use the same

procedure as described above. f will

not flash when function is

deactivated.

Control indicator f 3 109.

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights increase

visibility of the vehicle during daylight.

They are switched on automatically

during daytime when engine is

running.

The system switches between

daytime running lights and headlights

automatically, depending on the

lighting conditions.

Automatic light control 3 129.

LED headlights

LED headlight system contains a

variety of particular LEDs in each

headlight which enables the control of

different lighting programmes.

Light distribution and intensity of light

are variably triggered depending on

the lighting conditions, road type and

driving situation. The vehicle adapts

the headlights automatically to the

situation to enable optimal light

performance for the driver.

Some functions of the LED headlights

can be deactivated or activated in the

vehicle personalisation menu. Select

the relevant setting in Settings I

Vehicle in the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The following lighting functions are

available with light switch in position

AUTO or 9.

Town light

Activated automatically at a speed up

to approx. 31 mph. The beam is

shaped broadly and designed to

avoid glare of other road users.

Country light

Activated automatically at a speed

above approx. 31 mph. The

illumination of the current lane and

the side of the road is improved.

Oncoming and preceding vehicles

are not dazzled.

Curve light

Particular LEDs, based on steering

angle and speed, are additionally

triggered to improve lighting in

curves. This function is activated at

speeds from 25 mph to 43 mph. High

beam increases the intensity of the

curve lighting.

Lighting 133

Corner light

When turning off, depending on the

steering angle and the turn light,

particular LEDs are triggered which

illuminate the direction of travel. It is

activated up to a speed of 25 mph.

High beam increases the intensity of

the corner light.

Reverse parking function

To assist driver's orientation when

parking, both corner lights and

reversing light illuminate when

headlights are on and reverse gear is

engaged. They remain illuminated for

a short time after disengaging reverse

gear or until driving faster than

4 mph in a forward gear.

Dynamic automatic headlight

levelling

To prevent oncoming traffic from

being dazzled, headlight levelling is

automatically adjusted based on

inclination information measured by

front and rear axle, acceleration or

deceleration and vehicle speed.

Headlights when driving abroad

3 131.

Fault in LED headlight system

When the system detects a failure in

the LED headlight system, it selects a

preset position to avoid dazzling of

oncoming traffic. A warning is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.

In the event of an accident with airbag

deployment, the hazard warning

flashers are activated automatically.

134 Lighting

Turn lights

lever up : right turn light

lever down : left turn light

A resistance point can be felt when

moving the lever.

Constant flashing is activated when

the lever is being moved beyond the

resistance point. It is deactivated

when the steering wheel is moved in

the opposite direction or lever is

manually moved back to its neutral

position.

Activate temporary flashing by

holding the lever just before the

resistance point. Turn lights will flash

until lever is being released.

To activate three flashes, tap the

lever briefly without passing the

resistance point. With a trailer

connected, the turn light flashes

six times and tone frequency

changes.

Front fog lights

Operated by pressing >.

Light switch in position AUTO:

switching on front fog lights will switch

headlights on automatically.

Rear fog light

Operated by pressing ø.

Light switch in position AUTO:

switching on rear fog light will switch

headlights on automatically.

Light switch in position 8: rear fog

light can only be switched on with

front fog lights.

The vehicle rear fog light is

deactivated when towing a trailer or a

plug is connected with the socket, e.

g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Lighting 135

Parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, the

parking lights on one side can be

activated:

1. Switch off ignition.

2. Move indicator lever all the way up

(right parking lights) or down (left

parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and the

corresponding turn light control

indicator.

Reversing lights

The reversing light comes on when

the ignition is on and reverse gear is

selected.

Misted light covers

The inside of the light housing may

mist up briefly in poor, wet and cold

weather conditions, in heavy rain or

after washing. The mist disappears

quickly by itself; to help switch on the

headlights.

Interior lighting

Instrument panel

illumination control

Brightness of the following lights can

be adjusted in position AUTO when

the light sensor detects night

conditions, or in position 8 or 9.

● instrument panel illumination

● Info Display

● illuminated switches and

operation elements

Push and then turn A until the desired

brightness is obtained.

136 Lighting

Interior lights

During entry and exit of the vehicle,

the front and rear courtesy lights

automatically switch on and then off

after a delay.

Notice

In the event of an accident with

airbag deployment the courtesy

lights are turned on automatically.

Front courtesy light

press

: interior lights are

switched on or off

manually

press

: interior lights are not

automatically switched

on when a door is

opened. Deactivation is

indicated by a LED in the

switch.

Rear courtesy lights

Illuminate in conjunction with the front

courtesy light.

Reading lights

Operated by pressing the respective

reading light.

Lighting 137

Illustration shows rear reading light.

Sunvisor lights

Illuminates when the cover is opened.

Lighting features

Centre console lighting

Spotlight incorporated in the interior

lighting comes on when headlights

are switched on.

Entry lighting

Welcome lighting

The following lights are switched on

for a short time by unlocking the

vehicle with the radio remote control:

● headlights

● puddle lights in both outside

mirrors

● number plate lights

● instrument panel light

● interior lights

Some functions are only operable

when it is dark outside to facilitate

locating the vehicle.

The lighting switches off immediately

when the ignition is switched on.

Starting off 3 17.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The settings can be saved for the key

being used 3 25.

The following lights will additionally

switch on when the driver's door is

opened:

● illumination of some switches

● Driver Information Centre

● door pocket lights

Exit lighting

The following lights will switch on

when the ignition is switched off:

● interior lights

● instrument panel light

● puddle lights in both outside

mirrors

They will switch off automatically after

a delay. This function works only in

the dark.

138 Lighting

Path lighting

Headlights, tail lights and number

plate lights illuminate the surrounding

area for an adjustable time after

leaving the vehicle.

Activating

Halogen headlights

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Depending on version, remove

the ignition key.

3. Open the driver's door.

4. Pull the indicator lever.

5. Close the driver's door.

If the driver's door is not closed, the

lights switch off after two minutes.

Exit lighting is switched off

immediately if the indicator lever is

pulled while the driver's door is open.

LED headlights

Path lighting is activated, when the

ignition is switched off and the driver's

door is opened.

This function can be activated or

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Vehicle in the Info Display.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

The settings can be saved for the key

being used 3 25.

Battery discharge protection

Switching off electric lights

To prevent discharge of the vehicle

battery when the ignition is switched

off, some interior lights are switched

off automatically after some time.

Climate control 139

Climate control

Climate control systems ............. 139

Air conditioning system ........... 139

Electronic climate control

system .................................... 142

Auxiliary heater ........................ 148

Air vents ..................................... 148

Adjustable air vents ................. 148

Fixed air vents ......................... 149

Maintenance .............................. 149

Air intake ................................. 149

Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 149

Service .................................... 149

Climate control systems

Air conditioning system

Illustration shows functions which

may not be available for your

particular vehicle.

Controls for:

● Fan speed E

● Temperature TEMP

● Air distribution ",x and y

● Air conditioning A/C

● Demisting and defrosting á

● Air recirculation n

● External air (

● Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors b

● Heated windscreen ,

●Heated seats ß

Some changes of settings are

indicated briefly in the Info Display.

Activated functions are indicated by

the LED in the respective button.

Fan speed E

Adjust the air flow by turning E to the

desired speed.

clockwise : increase

anti-clockwise : decrease

Temperature TEMP

Adjust the temperature by turning

TEMP to the desired temperature.

red area : warmer

blue area : colder

Heating will not be fully effective until

the engine has reached normal

operating temperature.

140 Climate control

Air distribution ",x and y

Press:

": to windscreen and front door

windows

x: to head area and rear seats via

adjustable air vents

y: to front and rear foot well and

windscreen

Combinations are possible.

Air conditioning A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling.

Activation is indicated by the LED in

the button. Cooling is only functional

when the engine is running and

climate control fan is switched on.

Press A/C again to switch off cooling.

The air conditioning system cools and

dehumidifies (dries) as soon as the

outside temperature is slightly above

the freezing point. Therefore

condensation may form and drip from

under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required,

switch off the cooling system for fuel

saving reasons.

Activated cooling may inhibit

Autostops.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Demisting and defrosting the

windows á

● Press á: fan automatically

switches to higher speed, the air

distribution is directed towards

the windscreen.

● Set temperature controller

TEMP to warmest level.

● Switch on air conditioning A/C if

required.

● Switch on heated rear window b.

● Switch on heated

windscreen , if available.

● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the door

windows.

● For maximum demisting and

defrosting set fan speed to

highest level.

Notice

If á is pressed while the engine is

running, an Autostop will be inhibited

until á is pressed again.

If á is pressed while the engine is in

an Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Climate control 141

Air recirculation system n

Press n to activate air recirculation

mode, LED is indicated.

Select air recirculation to assist in

cooling the interior or in blocking

outside odours or exhaust.

Press n again to deactivate air

recirculation mode.

On version without heated

windscreen, press ( to deactivate

air recirculation. External air mode is

activated.

9Warning

The exchange of fresh air is

reduced in air recirculation mode.

In operation without cooling the air

humidity increases, so the

windows may mist up from inside.

The quality of the passenger

compartment air deteriorates,

which may cause the vehicle

occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air

conditions, the windscreen may mist

up from outside when cold air is

directed towards it. If windscreen

mists up from outside, activate

windscreen wiper and deactivate w.

External air mode (

Press (to activate external air

mode, LED is indicated.

Press n to activate air recirculation

mode. External air mode is

deactivated.

142 Climate control

Maximum cooling

Briefly open the windows so that hot

air can disperse quickly.

● Switch on air conditioning A/C.

● Press n for air recirculation

system on.

● Press x for air distribution.

● Set temperature control TEMP to

coldest level.

● Set fan speed E to highest level.

● Open all vents.

Version with heated

windscreen ,

If the vehicle is equipped with heated

windscreen, button ( is replaced

by button ,.

Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors b 3 42.

Heated windscreen , 3 43.

Heated seats q 3 54.

Electronic climate control

system

The dual zone climate control allows

different temperatures for driver side

and front passenger side.

In automatic mode, temperature, fan

speed and air distribution are

regulated automatically.

Illustration shows functions which

may not be available for your

particular vehicle.

Climate control 143

Controls for:

● rotary knob for temperature on

driver side

● rotary knob for temperature on

passenger side

●CLIMATE enters the Climate

setting menu in the Info-Display

● Fan speed increase ( and

decrease )

● Climate control ON/OFF or â

● Automatic mode AUTO

● Manual air recirculation n

● Demisting and defrosting à

● Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors b

● Heated windscreen ,

● Heated seats q

● Ventilated seats r

Activated functions are indicated by

the LED in the respective control.

The electronic climate control system

is only fully operational when the

engine is running.

Climate setting menu CLIMATE

Settings for

● Air distribution w, x, y

● Fan speed E

● Temperature for driver and

passenger side 23°/25°

● Dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNC

● Air conditioning A/C

can be triggered manually in the

Climate setting menu. Press

CLIMATE to enter the menu and

follow the touch buttons.

Climate setting menu can also be

displayed by touching button g in the

Info Display 3 116.

Changes of settings via the controls

are indicated as pop up in the

Info Display.

Automatic mode AUTO

Basic settings for automatic control

with maximum comfort:

● Press AUTO, the air distribution

and fan speed are regulated

automatically.

● Open all air vents to allow

optimised air distribution in

automatic mode.

144 Climate control

● Cooling must be activated in the

climate setting menu for optimal

cooling and demisting. Press

Climate to enter the menu and

follow the touch button to switch

on air conditioning A/C.

● Set the preselected

temperatures separately for

driver and front passenger using

the left and right rotary knob.

Recommended temperature is

22 °C. Temperature is indicated

briefly in displays beside the

rotary knobs and in the climate

setting menu.

● Air recirculation mode n

should be deactivated. When

deactivated the LED in the button

is not illuminated.

Manual settings

Climate control system settings can

be changed by activating the buttons

and rotary knobs as described below.

Changing a setting will deactivate the

automatic mode.

Fan speed ( )

Press upper button ( to increase or

lower button ) to decrease fan speed.

The fan speed is indicated as pop-up

in the Info Display. Fan speed can

also be changed by touch buttons in

the climate setting display. Press

Climate to enter the menu.

Pressing the lower button ) for longer:

fan and cooling are switched off.

To return to automatic mode: press

AUTO.

Air distribution w, x, y

Press Climate to enter the menu.

Touch:

w: to windscreen and front door

windows

x: to head area and rear seats via

adjustable air vents

y: to front and rear foot well and

windscreen

To return to automatic air distribution

press AUTO.

Climate control 145

Temperature preselection

Set the preselected temperatures

separately for driver and front

passenger to the desired value using

the left and right rotary knob. The

knob on the passenger side changes

the temperature for the passenger

side. The knob on the driver's side

changes the temperature for the

driver's side or for both sides

depending on activation of

synchronisation SYNC.

Recommended temperature is 22 °C.

Temperature is indicated in displays

beside the rotary knobs and as pop-

up in the Info Display.

If the minimum temperature Lo is set,

the climate control system runs at

maximum cooling, if cooling A/C is

switched on.

If the maximum temperature Hi is set,

the climate control system runs at

maximum heating.

Notice

If A/C is switched on, reducing the

set cabin temperature can cause the

engine to restart from an Autostop or

inhibit an Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNC

Press Climate to enter the menu.

Touch SYNC to link passenger side

temperature setting to the driver side.

When passenger side settings will be

adjusted, synchronisation is

deactivated and the LED

extinguishes.

Air conditioning A/C

Press Climate to enter the menu and

select the touch button A/C to switch

air conditioning on or off.

Cooling is only functional when the

engine is running and climate control

fan is switched on.

The air conditioning system cools and

dehumidifies (dries) when outside

temperature is above a specific level.

Therefore condensation may form

and drip from under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required,

switch off the cooling system for fuel

saving reasons.

146 Climate control

Manual air recirculation n

Press n to activate the air

recirculation mode. The LED in the

button illuminates to indicate

activation.

Press n again to deactivate

recirculation mode.

9Warning

The exchange of fresh air is

reduced in air recirculation mode.

In operation without cooling the air

humidity increases, so the

windows may mist up from inside.

The quality of the passenger

compartment air deteriorates,

which may cause the vehicle

occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air

conditions, the windscreen may mist

up from outside, when cold air is

directed towards it. If windscreen

mists up from outside, activate

windscreen wiper and deactivate w.

Automatic air recirculation

An air humidity sensor switches

automatically to external air if internal

air humidity is too high.

Demisting and defrosting the

windows à

● Press à. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate activation.

● Temperature and air distribution

are set automatically and the fan

runs at high speed.

● Activate air condition: Press

CLIMATE to show climate control

menu in the Info Display, then

select A/C.

● Switch on heated rear window b.

Climate control 147

● Switch on heated

windscreen , if available.

● To return to previous mode press

à again, to return to automatic

mode press AUTO.

Notice

If à is pressed while the engine is

running, an Autostop will be inhibited

until à is pressed again.

If à is pressed while the engine is in

an Autostop, the engine will restart

automatically.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Deactivation or activation of

Electronic climate control system

ON/OFF

Cooling, fan and automatic mode can

be switched off by pressing ON/OFF.

When the system is deactivated, the

LED in the button ON/OFF is not

illuminated.

Activation by pressing ON/OFF again

or AUTO. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate activation.

Version with heated

windscreen ,

If the vehicle is equipped with heated

windscreen, button ON/OFF is

replaced by button ,.

Climate control system will then

switched off by button â. Switch on

by pressing (.

148 Climate control

Basic settings

Following settings can be changed in

the Personalisation menu in the

Info Display:

● fan speed regulation in automatic

mode

● settings of automatic rear window

heating

● settings of automatic windscreen

dehumidification

● settings of automatic seat

heating

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors b 3 42.

Heated windscreen , 3 43.

Heated seats q 3 54.

Ventilated seats r 3 54.

Auxiliary heater

Air heater

Quickheat is an electric auxiliary air

heater which automatically warms up

the passenger compartment more

quickly.

Air vents

Adjustable air vents

At least one air vent must be open

while cooling is on.

Illustration shows centre air vents in

instrument panel.

Illustration shows outer air vents in

instrument panel.

Illustration shows air vents for rear

passenger.

Climate control 149

Direct the flow of air by tilting and

swivelling the slats.

To close the vent, swivel the slat

sideways.

9Warning

Do not attach any objects to the

slats of the air vents. Risk of

damage and injury in case of an

accident.

Fixed air vents

Additional air vents are located

beneath the windscreen and door

windows and in the foot wells.

Maintenance

Air intake

The air intake in front of the

windscreen in the engine

compartment must be kept clear to

allow air intake. Remove any leaves,

dirt or snow.

Cabin air filter

Change filter regulary for maximum

effect.

Air conditioning regular

operation

In order to ensure continuously

efficient performance, cooling must

be operated for a few minutes once a

month, irrespective of the weather

and time of year. Operation with

cooling is not possible when the

outside temperature is too low.

Service

For optimal cooling performance, it is

recommended to annually check the

climate control system, starting

three years after initial vehicle

registration, including:

● functionality and pressure test

● heating functionality

● leakage check

● check of drive belts

● cleaning of condenser and

evaporator drainage

● performance check

● cabin air filter check

150 Driving and operating

Driving and

operating

Driving hints ............................... 151

Control of the vehicle ............... 151

Steering ................................... 151

Starting and operating ............... 151

New vehicle running-in ............ 151

Ignition switch positions ........... 151

Power button ........................... 152

Retained power off .................. 154

Starting the engine .................. 154

Overrun cut-off ........................ 156

Stop-start system .................... 156

Parking .................................... 158

Engine exhaust .......................... 159

Exhaust filter ............................ 159

Catalytic converter ................... 161

AdBlue ..................................... 161

Automatic transmission .............. 164

Transmission display ............... 164

Gear selection ......................... 164

Manual mode ........................... 165

Electronic driving programmes 166

Fault ........................................ 167

Interruption of power supply .... 167

Manual transmission .................. 168

Drive systems ............................ 169

All-wheel drive ......................... 169

Brakes ........................................ 169

Antilock brake system ............. 169

Parking brake .......................... 170

Brake assist ............................. 172

Hill start assist ......................... 172

Ride control systems ................. 173

Traction Control system .......... 173

Electronic Stability Control ...... 174

Interactive driving system ........ 175

Driver assistance systems ......... 177

Cruise control .......................... 177

Speed limiter ........................... 179

Adaptive cruise control ............ 180

Forward collision alert ............. 189

Following distance indication ... 192

Active emergency braking ....... 193

Front pedestrian protection ..... 196

Parking assist .......................... 198

Side blind spot alert ................. 205

Lane change alert .................... 206

Panoramic view system ........... 208

Rear view camera ................... 210

Rear cross traffic alert ............. 212

Traffic sign assistant ................ 213

Lane keep assist ..................... 217

Fuel ............................................ 220

Fuel for petrol engines ............. 220

Fuel for diesel engines ............ 221

Refuelling ................................ 222

Trailer hitch ................................ 224

General information ................. 224

Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 224

Trailer towing ........................... 224

Towing equipment ................... 225

Trailer stability assist ............... 227

Driving and operating 151

Driving hints

Control of the vehicle

Never coast with engine not

running

Many systems will not function in this

situation (e.g. brake servo unit, power

steering). Driving in this manner is a

danger to yourself and others.

All systems function during an

Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Pedals

To ensure the pedal travel is

uninhibited, there must be no mats in

the area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats, which fit properly

and are fixed by the retainers on the

driver side.

Steering

If power steering assist is lost

because the engine stops or due to a

system malfunction, the vehicle can

be steered but may require increased

effort.

Starting and operating

New vehicle running-in

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for

the first few journeys.

During the first drive, smoke may

occur because of wax and oil

evaporating off the exhaust system.

Park the vehicle in the open for a

while after the first drive and avoid

inhaling the fumes.

During the running-in period, fuel and

engine oil consumption may be

higher.

Additionally, the cleaning process of

the exhaust filter may take place more

often.

Exhaust filter 3 159.

Ignition switch positions

Turn key:

152 Driving and operating

0: ignition off: Some functions

remain active until key is

removed or driver's door is

opened, provided the ignition was

on previously

1: accessory power mode: Steering

wheel lock released, some

electrical functions are operable,

ignition is off

2: ignition on power mode: Ignition

is on, diesel engine is preheating.

Control indicators illuminate and

most electrical functions are

operable. To turn the key from

position 2 to 1 or 0, first push the

key all the way in towards the

steering column.

3: engine start: Release key after

starting procedure begins

Steering wheel lock

Remove key from ignition switch and

turn steering wheel until it engages.

9Danger

Never remove the key from

ignition switch during driving as

this will cause steering wheel lock.

Power button

Electronic key must be inside the

vehicle.

Accessory power mode

Press Engine Start/Stop once without

operating clutch or brake pedal. The

yellow LED in the button illuminates.

Steering wheel lock is released and

some electrical functions are

operable, ignition is off.

Ignition on power mode

Press and hold Engine Start/Stop for

six seconds without operating clutch

or brake pedal. The green LED in the

button illuminates, diesel engine is

Driving and operating 153

preheating. Control indicators

illuminate and most electrical

functions are operable.

Engine start

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly while:

● manual transmission: operating

clutch pedal,

● automatic transmission:

operating brake pedal with

selector lever in P or N.

Starting the engine 3 154.

Ignition off

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly when

Autostop is activated or when engine

is running and vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission: apply the

parking brake and engage P.

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly

without operating clutch or brake

pedal when in ignition on power

mode.

Some functions remain active until

driver's door is opened, provided the

ignition was on previously.

Emergency engine shut off during

driving

Press Engine Start/Stop for more

than 2 seconds or press twice briefly

within 5 seconds 3 154.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock activates

automatically when:

● The vehicle is stationary.

● The ignition has been switched

off.

● The driver's door is opened.

To release steering wheel lock, open

and close driver's door and switch on

accessory mode or start the engine

directly.

9Warning

If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the vehicle must not be towed,

tow-started or jump-started as the

steering wheel lock cannot be

disengaged.

Operation on vehicles with

electronic key system in case of

failure

If either the electronic key fails or the

battery of the electronic key is weak,

the Driver Information Centre may

display No Remote Detected or

Replace Battery in Remote Key when

you try to start the vehicle.

Open the cover of the centre console

in front of the selector lever. Place the

electronic key across with buttons

upside in the transmitter pocket

beside the power outlet, as shown in

the illustration.

154 Driving and operating

Other objects, e.g. other keys,

transponder, tags, coins etc. must be

removed from the pocket.

Depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission), the brake pedal and

press Engine Start/Stop. Release the

button after starting procedure

begins.

To switch off the engine, press

Engine Start/Stop again. Remove the

electronic key from the transmitter

pocket.

This option is intended for

emergencies only. Replace the

electronic key battery as soon as

possible 3 22.

For unlocking or locking the doors,

see fault in radio remote control unit

or electronic key system 3 25.

Retained power off

The following electronic systems can

work until the driver's door is opened

or for 10 minutes after the ignition is

switched off:

● power windows

● sunroof

● power outlets

Starting the engine

Vehicles with ignition switch

Turn key to position 1 to release the

steering wheel lock.

Manual transmission: operate clutch

and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector lever

to P or N.

Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Diesel engines: turn the key to

position 2 for preheating and wait until

control indicator ! extinguishes.

Turn key briefly to position 3 and

release: an automatic procedure

operates the starter with a short delay

until the engine is running, see

Automatic Starter Control.

Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by depressing the clutch pedal

3 156.

Automatic transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by releasing the brake pedal 3 156.

Vehicles with power button

Driving and operating 155

Manual transmission: operate clutch

and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selector lever

to P or N.

Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Press Engine Start/Stop briefly: an

automatic procedure operates the

starter with a short delay until the

engine is running, see automatic

starter control.

To switch off the engine when vehicle

is stationary, press

Engine Start/Stop briefly. Automatic

transmission: apply the parking brake

and engage P.

To start the engine during an

Autostop:

Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by depressing the clutch pedal

3 156.

Automatic transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started

by releasing the brake pedal 3 156.

Emergency engine shut off during

driving

If the engine needs to be switched off

during driving in case of emergency,

press Engine Start/Stop for more than

2 seconds or press twice briefly within

5 seconds.

9Danger

Switching off the engine during

driving may cause loss of power

support for brake and steering

systems. Assistance systems and

airbag systems are disabled.

Lighting and brake lights will

extinguish. Therefore power down

the engine and ignition while

driving only when required in case

of emergency.

Starting the vehicle at low

temperatures

Starting the engine without additional

heaters is possible down to -25 °С for

diesel engines and -30 °C for petrol

engines. Required is an engine oil

with the correct viscosity, the correct

fuel, performed services and a

sufficiently charged vehicle battery.

With temperatures below -30 °C the

automatic transmission requires a

warming phase of approx. 5 minutes.

The selector lever must be in position

Automatic starter control

This function controls the engine

starting procedure. The driver does

not need to hold Engine Start/Stop

pressed. Once applied, the system

will go on starting automatically until

the engine is running. Because of the

checking procedure, the engine starts

running after a short delay.

156 Driving and operating

Possible reasons for a non-starting

engine:

● Clutch pedal not operated

(manual transmission).

● Brake pedal not operated or

selector lever not in P or N

(automatic transmission).

● Timeout occurred.

Turbo engine warm-up

Upon start-up, engine available

torque may be limited for a short time,

especially when the engine

temperature is cold. The limitation is

to allow the lubrication system to fully

protect the engine.

Overrun cut-off

The fuel supply is automatically cut off

during overrun, i.e. when the vehicle

is driven with a gear engaged but

accelerator pedal is released.

Depending on driving conditions, the

overrun cut-off may be deactivated.

Stop-start system

The stop-start system helps to save

fuel and to reduce the exhaust

emissions. When conditions allow, it

switches off the engine as soon as the

vehicle is at a low speed or at a

standstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in a

traffic jam. The ignition stays on.

Activation

The stop-start system is activated as

soon as the engine is started, the

vehicle starts-off and the conditions

as stated below in this section are

fulfilled.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start system

manually by pressing Ò. Deactivation

is indicated when the LED in the

button illuminates.

Autostop

Vehicles with manual transmission

An Autostop can be activated at a

standstill or at a low speed up to

9 mph.

Activate a conventional Autostop as

follows:

● Depress the clutch pedal.

● Set the lever to neutral.

● Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off while

the ignition stays on.

Driving and operating 157

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by the

needle at the AUTOSTOP position in

the tachometer.

After restarting, the idle speed is

indicated.

During an Autostop, the heating and

brake performance will be

maintained.

Conditions for an Autostop

The stop-start system checks if each

of the following conditions is fulfilled:

● The stop-start system is not

manually deactivated.

● The bonnet is fully closed.

● The driver's door is closed or the

driver's seat belt is fastened.

● The vehicle battery is sufficiently

charged and in good condition.

● The engine is warmed up.

● The engine coolant temperature

is not too high.

● The engine exhaust temperature

is not too high, e.g. after driving

with high engine load.

● The ambient temperature is

above -5 °C.

● The climate control system

allows an Autostop.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.

● Between the last restart and a

new Autostop must be about

10 seconds.

● The self-cleaning function of the

exhaust filter is not active.

● The vehicle was driven at least at

walking speed since the last

Autostop.

Otherwise an Autostop will be

inhibited.

The stop-start system will be

deactivated on inclines of 12% or

more.

Certain settings of the climate control

system may inhibit an Autostop. See

Climate control chapter for more

details 3 139.

Immediately after motorway driving,

an Autostop may be inhibited.

New vehicle running-in 3 151.

Vehicle battery discharge protection

To ensure reliable engine restarts,

several battery discharge protection

features are implemented as part of

the stop-start system.

Power saving measures

During an Autostop, several electrical

features e.g. auxiliary electric heater

or heated rear window are disabled or

switched to a power saving mode.

The fan speed of the climate control

system is reduced to save power.

158 Driving and operating

Restart of the engine by the driver

Vehicles with manual transmission

All engines can be restarted in two

ways: with a conventional restart or a

late restart.

Conventional restart

Depress the clutch pedal without

depressing the brake pedal to restart

the engine.

Late restart

Late restart is only available on

inclines up to 5%.

● Depress the brake pedal.

● Depress the clutch pedal.

● Select first gear.

● Release the brake pedal to

restart the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Release the brake pedal or move

selector lever out of D into N or P to

restart the engine.

Restart of the engine by the stop-

start system

The selector lever must be in neutral

to enable an automatic restart.

If one of the following conditions

occurs during an Autostop, the

engine will be restarted automatically

by the stop-start system:

● The stop-start system is

manually deactivated.

● The bonnet is opened.

● The driver's seat belt is

unfastened and the driver's door

is opened.

● The engine temperature is too

low.

● The charging level of the vehicle

battery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is not

sufficient.

● The vehicle is driven at least at

walking speed.

● The climate control system

requests an engine start.

● The air conditioning is manually

switched on.

If the bonnet is not fully closed, a

warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

If an electrical accessory, e.g. a

portable CD player, is connected to

the power outlet, a brief power drop

during the restart might be noticeable.

Notice

If a trailer or a bike carrier is

attached, late restart is deactivated.

Parking

9Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on an

easily ignitable surface. The

high temperature of the

exhaust system could ignite the

surface.

● Always apply the parking

brake. Pull switch m for

approx. one second and check

if the control indicator m

illuminates.

The electric parking brake is

applied when control indicator

m illuminates 3 106.

● Switch off the engine.

Driving and operating 159

● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engage

first gear or set the selector

lever to position P before

removing the ignition key or

switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button. On

an uphill slope, turn the front

wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill

slope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to position

P before removing the ignition

key or switching off ignition on

vehicles with power button.

Turn the front wheels towards

the kerb.

● Close the windows and the

sunroof.

● Remove the ignition key from

the ignition switch or switch off

ignition on vehicles with power

button. Turn the steering wheel

until the steering wheel lock is

felt to engage.

For vehicles with automatic

transmission, the key can only

be removed when the selector

lever is in position P.

● Lock the vehicle by pressing the

button on the door handle or the

button e on the remote control.

● Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.

● The engine cooling fans may run

after the engine has been

switched off 3 230.

Caution

After running at high engine

speeds or with high engine loads,

operate the engine briefly at a low

load or run in neutral for

approx. 30 seconds before

switching off, in order to protect

the turbocharger.

Notice

In the event of an accident with

airbag deployment, the engine is

turned off automatically if the vehicle

comes to a standstill within a certain

time.

Engine exhaust

9Danger

Engine exhaust gases contain

poisonous carbon monoxide,

which is colourless and odourless

and could be fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases enter the interior

of the vehicle, open the windows.

Have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop.

Avoid driving with an open load

compartment, otherwise exhaust

gases could enter the vehicle.

Exhaust filter

The exhaust filter is a particle filter for

diesel and petrol engines.

160 Driving and operating

Automatic cleaning process

The exhaust filter system filters soot

particles out of the exhaust gases.

The system includes a self-cleaning

function that runs automatically

during driving without any notification.

The filter is cleaned by periodically

burning off the soot particles at high

temperature. This process takes

place automatically under set driving

conditions and may take up to

25 minutes. Typically it needs

between 7 and 12 minutes. Autostop

is not available and fuel consumption

may be higher during this period. The

emission of smells and smoke during

this process is normal.

System requires cleaning

Under certain conditions, e.g. driving

short distances, the system cannot

clean itself automatically.

If cleaning of the filter is required and

if previous driving conditions did not

enable automatic cleaning, it will be

indicated by a warning message in

the Driver Information Centre.

A warning message appears when

exhaust filter is full. Start cleaning

process as soon as possible.

A warning message also appears

when exhaust filter has reached the

maximum filling level. Start cleaning

process immediately to avoid

damage to the engine.

Activate self-cleaning process

Cleaning process is completed more

quickly at high engine speeds and

loads. Therefore, drive in lower gears

than normal, and use manual gear

selection on vehicles with automatic

transmission. Usage of electrical

consumers like air conditioning and

heated windows to increase engine

load supports cleaning process.

Caution

If possible, do not interrupt

cleaning process. Drive until

cleaning is completed to avoid the

need for service or repair by a

workshop.

Vehicles with petrol engine

To activate cleaning process,

continue driving, keep engine speed

above 2500 rpm. Shift down if

necessary.

Drive dynamically at different engine

speeds. Use engine brake for

deceleration, if possible.

Keep on driving until self-cleaning

operation is complete and the display

message disappears.

Vehicles with diesel engine

To activate cleaning process,

continue driving, keep engine speed

above 2000 rpm, ideally and

continuously around 2500 rpm. Shift

down if necessary.

Keep on driving until self-cleaning

operation is complete and the display

message disappears.

Driving and operating 161

Cleaning process not possible

If cleaning is not possible for any

reason, control indicator Z

illuminates and a warning message

appears in the Driver Information

Centre. Engine power may be

reduced. Seek the assistance of a

workshop immediately.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter reduces the

amount of harmful substances in the

exhaust gases.

Caution

Fuel grades other than those listed

on pages 3 220, 3 284 could

damage the catalytic converter or

electronic components.

Unburnt petrol will overheat and

damage the catalytic converter.

Therefore avoid excessive use of

the starter, running the fuel tank

dry and starting the engine by

pushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, uneven

engine running, a reduction in engine

performance or other unusual

problems, have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop as soon as

possible. In an emergency, driving

can be continued for a short period,

keeping vehicle speed and engine

speed low.

AdBlue

General information

The selective catalytic reduction

(BlueInjection) is a method to

substantially reduce the nitrogen

oxides in the exhaust emission. This

is achieved by injecting a Diesel

Exhaust Fluid (DEF) into the exhaust

system. The ammonia released by

the fluid reacts with nitrous gases

(NOx) from the exhaust and turns it

into nitrogen and water.

The designation of this fluid is

AdBlue®. It is a non-toxic, non-

flammable, colourless and odourless

fluid which consists of 32% urea and

68% water.

9Warning

Avoid contact of your eyes or skin

with AdBlue.

In case of eye or skin contact,

rinse off with water.

Caution

Avoid contact of the paintwork with

AdBlue.

In case of contact, rinse off with

water.

AdBlue freezes at a temperature of

approx. -11 °C. As the vehicle is

equipped with an AdBlue pre-heater,

the emissions reduction at low

temperatures is ensured. The AdBlue

pre-heater works automatically.

The typical AdBlue consumption is

approx. 2 l per 600 miles, but can also

be higher depending on driving

behaviour (e.g. high load or towing).

AdBlue tank

The AdBlue tank level can be found in

the display menu.

162 Driving and operating

Level warnings

Depending on the calculated range of

AdBlue, different messages are

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. The messages and the

restrictions are a legal requirement.

The first possible warning is AdBlue

Range: 1500 miles.

This warning will show up once briefly

with the calculated range. Driving is

possible without any restrictions.

The next warning level is entered with

a range below 1090 miles. The

message with the current range will

always be displayed when ignition is

switched on and needs to be

confirmed 3 110. Refill AdBlue before

entering the next warning level.

At an AdBlue range below 560 miles,

the following warning messages are

alternately displayed and cannot be

dismissed:

●AdBlue Low Refill Now

●Engine Restart Prevented in

560 miles.

Additionally, control indicator Y

flashes continuously.

Notice

In case of high AdBlue consumption,

the Driver Information Centre may

display this warning without the

previous warning stages.

The last warning level is entered

when the AdBlue tank is empty.

Restart of the engine is not possible.

The following warning messages are

alternately displayed and cannot be

dismissed:

●AdBlue Empty Refill Now

●Engine Will Not Restart.

Additionally, control indicator Y

flashes continuously.

With active prevention of an engine

start, the following message will be

displayed:

Refill AdBlue To Start Vehicle.

The tank must be refilled completely

with AdBlue, otherwise restarting of

the engine is not possible 3 289.

High emission warnings

If the exhaust emission rises above a

certain value, warnings similar to the

range warnings will be displayed in

the Driver Information Centre.

Requests to have the exhaust system

checked and finally the

announcement of the prevention of

an engine restart are displayed.

These restrictions are a legal

requirement.

Consult a workshop for assistance.

Refilling AdBlue

Caution

Only use AdBlue that complies

with European standards

DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1.

Do not use additives.

Do not dilute AdBlue.

Otherwise the selective catalytic

reduction system could be

damaged.

Driving and operating 163

Notice

Whenever a filling pump with a

nozzle for passenger cars is not

available at a filling station, use only

AdBlue bottles or canisters with a

sealed refill adapter for refilling, to

prevent splashback and overspill,

and in order to ensure that the fumes

from the tank are captured and do

not emerge. AdBlue in bottles or

canisters is available in many filling

stations and can be purchased e.g.

at Vauxhall dealers and other retail

outlets.

Since AdBlue has a limited

durability, check the date of expiry

before refilling.

Notice

When unscrewing the protective cap

from the filler neck, ammonia fumes

may emerge. Do not inhale as the

fumes have a pungent smell. The

fumes are not harmful by inhalation.

The AdBlue tank should be filled

completely. This must be done if the

warning message regarding

prevention of an engine restart is

already displayed.

The vehicle must be parked on a level

surface.

The filler neck for AdBlue is located

behind the fuel filler flap, which is

located at right rear side of the

vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be opened

if the vehicle is unlocked.

1. Remove key from ignition switch.

2. Close all doors to avoid ammonia

fumes entering the interior of the

vehicle.

3. Release the fuel filler flap by

pushing the flap 3 222.

4. Unscrew protective cap from the

filler neck.

5. Open AdBlue canister.

6. Mount one end of the hose on the

canister and screw the other end

on the filler neck.

7. Lift the canister until it is empty, or

until the flow from the canister has

stopped. This can take up to

five minutes.

8. Place the canister on the ground

to empty the hose, wait

15 seconds.

9. Unscrew the hose from the filler

neck.

10. Mount the protective cap and turn

clockwise until it engages.

Notice

Dispose of AdBlue canister

according to environmental

requirements. To reuse the hose

flush it with clear water after usage.

164 Driving and operating

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission permits

automatic gear shifting (automatic

mode) or manual gear shifting

(manual mode).

Manual shifting is possible in manual

mode by tapping the selector lever to

+ or - or pulling the steering wheel

paddles.

Transmission display

Illustrations show different versions.

The mode or selected gear is shown

in the Driver Information Centre.

In automatic mode, the driving

programme is indicated by D.

In manual mode, M and the number

of the selected gear is indicated.

R indicates reverse gear.

N indicates neutral position.

P indicates park position.

Gear selection

P: park position, wheels are locked,

engage only when the vehicle is

stationary

R: reverse gear, engage only when

the vehicle is stationary

N: neutral

D: automatic mode

M: manual mode

<: upshift in manual mode

]: downshift in manual mode

Driving and operating 165

The selector lever is locked in P and

can only be moved when the ignition

is on, the release button on the

selector lever is pushed and the brake

pedal is applied.

Without brake pedal applied, control

indicator j illuminates.

If the selector lever is not in P when

the ignition is switched off, control

indicator j flashes.

To engage P or R, press the release

button.

The engine can only be started with

lever in position P or N. When position

N is selected, press brake pedal or

apply parking brake before starting.

Do not accelerate while engaging a

gear. Never depress the accelerator

pedal and brake pedal at the same

time.

When a gear is engaged, the vehicle

begins to creep when the brake is

released.

Engine braking

To utilise the engine braking effect,

select a lower gear in good time when

driving downhill, see manual mode.

Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle is only

permissible if the vehicle is stuck in

sand, mud or snow. Move the selector

lever between D and R in a repeat

pattern. Do not race the engine and

avoid sudden acceleration.

Parking

Apply the parking brake and engage

The ignition key can only be removed

when the selector lever is in position

Manual mode

Selector lever

Move selector lever out of position D

towards the left in position M.

Manual mode M can be activated

from position D in each driving

situation and speed.

Move selector lever to the front + to

shift to a higher gear.

Move selector lever to the rear - to

shift to a lower gear.

The selected gear is indicated in the

instrument cluster.

166 Driving and operating

Steering wheel paddles

Move selector lever out of position D

towards the left in position M.

Manual mode M can be activated

from position D in each driving

situation and speed.

Pull steering wheel paddles to select

gears manually.

Pull right paddle + to shift to a higher

gear.

Pull left paddle - to shift to a lower

gear.

Multiple pulls allow gears to be

skipped.

The selected gear is indicated in the

instrument cluster.

Temporary manual mode in drive

mode D

Manual paddle shifting is also

possible in automatic mode D. Upon

completion of manual shifting

operation, transmission changes to

automatic mode D after a defined

time.

To interrupt manual mode and return

to D, do one of the following:

● Press + paddle for 1 second.

● Move selector lever towards the

left to manual mode and back to

position D.

If the vehicle is at a standstill and

engine is idling, the transmission will

remain in temporary manual mode. It

changes to automatic mode when

accelerator pedal is operated for a

defined time, and no paddle shifting

at the steering wheel is performed.

General

If a higher gear is selected when

vehicle speed is too low, or a lower

gear when vehicle speed is too high,

the shift is not executed. This can

cause a message in the Driver

Information Centre.

In manual mode, no automatic

shifting to a higher gear takes place

at high engine revolutions, except

activating the kickdown function.

Gear shift indication

The symbol R or S with a number

beside it is indicated when gear

shifting is recommended for fuel

saving reasons.

Shift indication appears only in

manual mode.

Electronic driving

programmes

● When SPORT mode is engaged,

the vehicle shifts at higher engine

speeds (unless cruise control is

on).

SPORT mode 3 175.

Driving and operating 167

● Special programmes

automatically adapt the shifting

points when driving up inclines or

down hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or on

other slippery surfaces, the

electronic transmission control

enables the driver to manually

select first, second or third gear

for starting off.

Kickdown

Pressing down the accelerator pedal

beyond the kickdown detent will lead

to maximum acceleration

independent of the selected driving

mode. The transmission shifts to a

lower gear depending on engine

speed and shifts to a higher gear at

high engine revolutions.

Overheat protection

In the event of transmission-

overheating due to high outside

temperatures or sporty driving style,

the torque and the maximum speed of

the engine can be temporarily

reduced.

Fault

In the event of a fault a vehicle

message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

6-gear automatic transmission:

electronic transmission control

enables only fourth gear; 8-gear

automatic transmission: electronic

transmission control enables only

third gear. The transmission no

longer shifts automatically.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Interruption of power supply

In the event of an interruption of

power supply, the selector lever

cannot be moved out of the P

position.

The ignition key cannot be removed

from the ignition switch.

If the vehicle battery is discharged,

start the vehicle using jump leads

3 268.

If the vehicle battery is not the cause

of the fault, release the selector lever.

1. Apply parking brake.

2. Release the selector lever trim

from the centre console. Poke

with a finger into the leather

socket beside the selector lever

and pull the trim up carefully, there

is a cable attached to it. Slide trim

slightly forward as it is hinged on

its rear side. Tilt loose trim to the

left side to aviod tensioning the

cable.

168 Driving and operating

3. Insert a small stick (e.g. a pen or

screwdriver) into the opening near

the selector lever. Push down the

stick vertically and move the

selector lever out of P. If this

position is engaged again, the

selector lever will be locked again.

Have the cause of the power

supply interruption remedied by a

workshop.

4. Mount the selector lever trim onto

the centre console and refit.

Manual transmission

To engage reverse, depress the

clutch pedal and then press the

release button on the selector lever

and engage the gear.

If the gear does not engage, set the

lever to neutral, release the clutch

pedal and depress again; then repeat

gear selection.

Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.

When operating, depress the clutch

pedal completely. Do not use the

pedal as a foot rest.

When clutch slip is detected for a

specific time, the engine power will be

reduced. A warning is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre. Release

the clutch.

Caution

It is not advisable to drive with the

hand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 107.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Driving and operating 169

Drive systems

All-wheel drive

The All-wheel drive system enhances

driving characteristics and stability,

and helps to achieve the best

possible driveability regardless of

ground surface. The system is always

active and cannot be deactivated.

The torque is distributed steplessly

between the wheels of the front and

rear axle up to a torque split of 50%

to 50%. Depending on the driving

conditions, i.e. steady state driving,

All wheel drive system transfers a

minimum amount of torque for fuel

efficiency. Additionally the torque

vectoring between the rear wheels is

distributed depending on the vehicle

dynamic and surface.

This is possible because the All wheel

drive system operates with two

clutches, one on each side.

For optimum system performance,

the vehicle's tyres should not have

varying degrees of wear.

If a service message is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre, the

system may have limited functionality

(or be completely disabled in some

cases, i.e. the vehicle switches to

Front-wheel drive). Seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Towing the vehicle 3 270.

Brakes

The brake system comprises two

independent brake circuits.

If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can

still be braked using the other brake

circuit. However, braking effect is

achieved only when the brake pedal

is depressed firmly. Considerably

more force is needed for this. The

braking distance is extended. Seek

the assistance of a workshop before

continuing the journey.

When the engine is not running, the

support of the brake servo unit

disappears once the brake pedal has

been depressed once or twice.

Braking effect is not reduced, but

braking requires significantly greater

force. It is especially important to bear

this in mind when being towed.

Control indicator R 3 106.

Active emergency braking 3 193.

Antilock brake system

Antilock brake system (ABS)

prevents the wheels from locking.

170 Driving and operating

ABS starts to regulate brake pressure

as soon as a wheel shows a tendency

to lock. The vehicle remains

steerable, even during hard braking.

ABS control is made apparent

through a pulse in the brake pedal

and the noise of the regulation

process.

For optimum braking, keep the brake

pedal fully depressed throughout the

braking process, despite the fact that

the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce

the pressure on the pedal.

After starting off, the system performs

a self-test which may be audible.

Control indicator u 3 106.

Adaptive brake light

During full braking, all three brake

lights flash for the duration of ABS

control.

Fault

9Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, the

wheels may be liable to lock due

to braking that is heavier than

normal. The advantages of ABS

are no longer available. During

hard braking, the vehicle can no

longer be steered and may

swerve.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Parking brake

9Warning

Before leaving the vehicle, check

parking brake status. Control

indicator j illuminate constantly

when electric parking brake is

applied.

Electric parking brake

Manual application

Pull the switch m. If control indicator

m illuminates, electric parking brake

is applied.

The electric parking brake can always

be activated, even if the ignition is off.

Do not operate electric parking brake

system too often without engine

running as this will discharge the

vehicle battery.

Driving and operating 171

Releasing

Switch on ignition. Keep foot brake

pedal depressed and then push

switch m. If control indicator m

extinguishes, electric parking brake is

released.

Drive away function

Vehicles with manual transmission:

Depressing the clutch pedal and then

slightly releasing the clutch pedal and

slightly depressing the accelerator

pedal releases the electric parking

brake automatically. This is not

possible when switch m is pulled at

the same time.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Engaging D and then depressing the

accelerator pedal releases the

electric parking brake automatically.

This is not possible when switch m is

pulled at the same time.

Dynamic braking when vehicle is

moving

When the vehicle is moving and the

switch m is kept pulled, the electric

parking brake system will decelerate

the vehicle, but will not apply

statically.

As soon as the switch m is released,

dynamic braking will be stopped.

Automatic application

Vehicles with automatic transmission

If the vehicle is equipped with

automatic transmission and adaptive

cruise control is active, electric

parking brake is applied automatically

when vehicle is stopped by the

system for more than 2 minutes.

Parking brake releases automatically

after moving off.

Vehicles with manual transmission

The electric parking brake will apply

automatically if:

● vehicle is stationary

● vehicles with power button:

power button is pushed to turn off

the engine

● vehicles with ignition key: engine

is turned off and key is being

removed from the ignition switch

A precondition for automatic

application is that Extended Hill Start

Assist is activated in the vehicle

personalisation 3 122.

Deactivation

To suppress the automatic

application on vehicles with manual

transmission temporarily until the

next ignition cycle:

1. with engine running, depress

brake pedal and m switch at the

same time

2. release both brake pedal and m

switch

3. within 10 seconds: turn off engine

and remove key from ignition

switch

To deactivate automatic application

permanently, deactivate Extended

Hill Start Assist in the vehicle

personalisation 3 122

Functionality check

When the vehicle is not moving, the

electric parking brake might be

applied automatically. This is done to

check the system.

172 Driving and operating

Fault

Failure mode of electric parking brake

is indicated by a control indicator j

and by a vehicle message which is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Control indicator m flashes: electric

parking brake is not fully applied or

released. When continuously

flashing, release electric parking

brake and retry applying.

Brake assist

If brake pedal is depressed quickly

and forcefully, maximum brake force

is automatically applied.

Operation of brake assist might

become apparent by a pulse in the

brake pedal and a greater resistance

when depressing the brake pedal.

Maintain steady pressure on the

brake pedal as long as full braking is

required. Maximum brake force is

automatically reduced when brake

pedal is released.

Hill start assist

The system helps preventing

unintended movement when driving

away on inclines.

When releasing the brake pedal after

stopping on an incline, brakes remain

on for further 2 seconds. The brakes

release automatically as soon as the

vehicle begins to accelerate. The hill

start assist will not activate if one of

the following conditions occurs:

● forward gear is engaged when

facing downhill

● reverse gear is engaged when

facing uphill

● driver seat belt is unfastened

● driver's door is open

Extended hill start assist

This function holds the vehicle

stationary for up to 5 minutes after the

brake pedal is released.

The electric parking brake will be

automatically activated to prevent

vehicle movement when one of the

following conditions occurs:

● extended hill start assist is

deactivated after 5 minutes

● ignition is switched off

● driver's exit is detected

Hill start assist or extended hill start

assist can be selected in the vehicle

personalisation 3 122.

Notice

Automatic transmission only: hill

start assist and extended hill start

assist will not be activated in neutral

gear. If neutral gear is selected

during an active hold, assists will

deactivate and vehicle may start

moving.

Driving and operating 173

Ride control systems

Traction Control system

The Traction Control system (TC) is a

component of the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC).

TC improves driving stability when

necessary, regardless of the type of

road surface or tyre grip, by

preventing the drive wheels from

spinning.

As soon as the drive wheels starts to

spin, engine output is reduced and

the wheel spinning the most is braked

individually. This considerably

improves the driving stability of the

vehicle on slippery road surfaces.

TC is operational after each engine

start as soon as the control indicator

b extinguishes.

When TC operates b flashes.

9Warning

Do not let this special safety

feature tempt you into taking risks

when driving.

Adapt speed to the road

conditions.

Control indicator b 3 107.

Deactivation

TC can be switched off when spinning

of drive wheels is required: press t

briefly.

Control indicator k illuminates.

A status message appears in the

Driver Information Centre when TC is

deactivated.

When TC is deactivated, ESC

remains active but with higher control

threshold.

TC is reactivated by pressing t again.

A status message pops up in the

Driver Information Centre when TC is

reactivated.

TC is also reactivated the next time

the ignition is switched on.

Fault

If there is a fault in the system the

control indicator b illuminates

continuously and a message appears

in the Driver Information Centre. The

system is not operational.

174 Driving and operating

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Electronic Stability Control

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

improves driving stability when

necessary, regardless of the type of

road surface or tyre grip.

As soon as the vehicle starts to

swerve (understeer / oversteer),

engine output is reduced and the

wheels are braked individually.

ESC operates in combination with the

Traction Control system (TC). It

prevents the drive wheels from

spinning.

Torque distribution is a special

feature that allocates the torque to the

drive wheels before the ESC

intervenes. When cornering, the

wheels on the inner curve are braked

individually. Additionally, engine

torque will be delivered to the drive

wheel on the outer curve. This

reduces the tendency of

understeering and improves traction

when cornering fast.

ESC is operational after each engine

start as soon as the control indicator

b extinguishes.

When ESC operates b flashes.

9Warning

Do not let this special safety

feature tempt you into taking risks

when driving.

Adapt speed to the road

conditions.

Control indicator b 3 107.

Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated:

● hold t pressed for a minimum of

five seconds: ESC and TC are

both deactivated. k and t

illuminate and status messages

appear in the Driver Information

Centre.

Driving and operating 175

● To deactivate only Traction

control system press button t

briefly: TC is inactive but ESC

remains active, k illuminates. A

status message appears in the

Driver Information Centre when

TC is deactivated.

ESC is reactivated by pressing the t

button again. If the TC system was

previously disabled, both TC and

ESC are reactivated. k and t

extinguishes when TC and ESC are

reactivated.

ESC is also reactivated the next time

the ignition is switched on.

Fault

If there is a fault in the system the

control indicator b illuminates

continuously and a message appears

in the Driver Information Centre. The

system is not operational.

Have the cause of the fault remedied

by a workshop.

Interactive driving system

FlexRide

FlexRide driving system allows the

driver to select between three driving

modes:

● SPORT mode: press SPORT,

LED illuminates.

● TOUR mode: press TOUR, LED

illuminates.

● AUTO or Standard / Normal

mode: neither SPORT nor

TOUR is pressed, no LED

illuminates.

Deactivate SPORT mode or TOUR

mode by pressing corresponding

button once more.

In each driving mode Flex Ride

adjusts the following electronic

systems:

● electronic damping control

● accelerator pedal control

● electronic power steering control

● automatic transmission

● adaptive cruise control

● all-wheel drive

● engine sound enhancement

● instrument cluster theme

SPORT mode

The settings of the systems are

adjusted for a sportier driving style:

● Damping of shock absorbers is

set up for increased handling and

agility.

● The engine reacts more quickly

to accelerator pedal changes.

● Steering support is sportier.

176 Driving and operating

● Automatic transmission shift

points optimised for sporty

driving.

● Adaptive cruise control is

adjusted for a sportier driving

style.

● All-wheel drive supports active

sporty driving of the vehicle.

● Engine sound enhancement

intensifies interior engine sound

in a sporty manner.

● Cluster theme changes to sport.

TOUR mode

TOUR mode adjusts the settings of

the systems for a comfortable driving

style.

● Damping of shock absorbers is

adapted for increased driving

comfort.

● Steering efforts are reduced.

● Adaptive cruise control is

adjusted for a more relaxed

driving style.

AUTO mode

All versions except GSi: All settings of

the systems are preset to standard

values optimised for daily driving

(default mode). This is the fully

adaptive mode, adjusting systems to

both comfort and sport settings

depending on driving style and driving

situation.

Normal mode

GSi versions only: All settings of the

systems are preset to standard

values optimised for daily driving

(default mode). This mode keeps the

standard values independent of

driving style or driving situation.

Adaptive drive mode control

Within each manually selected driving

mode SPORT, TOUR or AUTO, Drive

Mode Control (DMC) detects and

analyses continuously the driving

situation and the driver's driving style.

If necessary, DMC automatically

adjusts damping and steering for the

duration of the occuring situation.

If, for example, normal settings are

active in AUTO mode and DMC

detects a sporty driving behaviour, it

automatically changes systems into

sporty settings unless the driver

deselects sporty damping or steering

in the Sport Mode Customisation.

If, for another example, comfort

settings are active in TOUR mode

and whilst driving on a winding road a

sudden hard brake is necessary,

DMC will detect the dynamic vehicle

condition and changes the settings

for suspension back to normal

(default) setting to enhance vehicle

stability.

When the driving characteristic or the

dynamic vehicle state returns to the

former state, DMC will change to

preselected settings.

Driving and operating 177

Settings

The settings of drive modes can be

changed in the vehicle

personalisation menu in the Info

Display 3 122.

Driver assistance

systems

9Warning

Driver assistance systems are

developed to support the driver

and not to replace the driver's

attention.

The driver stays in full control of

the vehicle and accepts full

responsibility when driving the

vehicle.

When using driver assistance

systems, always take care

regarding the current traffic

situation and follow applicable

traffic rules.

Cruise control

The cruise control can store and

maintain speeds of approx. 20 mph to

maximum vehicle speed. Deviations

from the stored speeds may occur

when driving uphill or downhill.

Activating in first gear is not possible.

Do not use the cruise control if it is not

advisable to maintain a constant

speed.

Control indicator m 3 109.

Switching on the system

Press m; control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates white.

178 Driving and operating

Activation of the functionality

Accelerate to the desired speed and

turn thumb wheel to SET/-, the

current speed is stored and

maintained. Control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates green.

On Mid- and Uplevel display m

illuminates green and set speed is

indicated. Accelerator pedal can be

released.

Vehicle speed can be increased by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

When the accelerator pedal is

released, the previously stored speed

is resumed.

Cruise control remains activated

while gearshifting.

Increase speed

With cruise control active, hold thumb

wheel turned to RES/+ or briefly turn

to RES/+ repeatedly: speed

increases continuously or in small

increments.

Alternatively accelerate to the desired

speed and store by turning to SET/-.

Reduce speed

With cruise control active, hold thumb

wheel turned to SET/- or briefly turn to

SET/- repeatedly: speed decreases

continuously or in small increments.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press y; control indicator m in

instrument cluster illuminates white.

On Mid- or Uplevel display m

changes to white.

Cruise control is deactivated, but not

switched off. Last stored speed

remains in memory for later speed

resume.

Automatic deactivation:

● Vehicle speed is below approx.

20 mph.

● Vehicle speed drops more than

15 mph below the set speed.

● The brake pedal is depressed.

● The clutch pedal is depressed for

a few seconds.

● The selector lever is in N.

● Engine speed is in a very low

range.

● The Traction Control system or

Electronic Stability Control is

operating.

● Parking brake is applied.

● Simultaneous pressing RES/+

and brake pedal deactivates

cruise control and will delete

stored speed.

Resume stored speed

Turn thumb wheel to RES/+ at a

speed above 20 mph. The stored

speed will be obtained.

Driving and operating 179

Switching off the system

Press m, control indicator m in

instrument cluster extinguishes. The

stored speed is deleted.

Pressing L to activate the speed

limiter or switching off the ignition also

switches off cruise control and

deletes the stored speed.

Speed limiter

The speed limiter prevents the

vehicle exceeding a preset maximum

speed.

The maximum speed can be set at

speeds above 15 mph up to

125 mph.

The driver can only accelerate up to

the preset speed. Deviations from the

limited speed may occur when driving

downhill.

The preset speed limit is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre when

the system is active.

Activation

Press L, symbol L illuminates in the

Driver Information Centre.

If cruise control has been activated

before, it is switched off when speed

limiter is activated and the control

indicator m extinguishes.

Set speed limit

Accelerate to the desired speed and

briefly turn thumb wheel to SET/-: the

current speed is stored as maximum

speed.

On Baselevel display L and the

speed limit is displayed.

On Mid- and Uplevel display L

changes to green.

Change speed limit

With speed limiter active, hold or

briefly turn thumb wheel to RES/+ to

increase or SET/- to decrease the

desired maximum speed.

Exceeding the speed limit

When exceeding the limited speed

without driver input, the speed will

flash in the Driver Information Centre

and a chime sounds during this

period.

In the event of an emergency, it is

possible to exceed the speed limit by

depressing the accelerator pedal

firmly nearly to the final point. In this

case no chime appears.

180 Driving and operating

Release the accelerator pedal and

the speed limiter function is

reactivated once a speed lower than

the limit speed is obtained.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press y: speed limiter is deactivated

and the vehicle can be driven without

speed limit.

On Baselevel display the stored

limited speed is indicated in brackets.

On Mid- or Uplevel display L

changes to white.

Additionally, a corresponding

message appears.

Speed limiter is deactivated, but not

switched off. Last stored speed

remains in memory for later speed

resume.

Resume limit speed

Turn thumb wheel to RES/+. The

stored speed limit will be obtained

and is indicated without brackets in

the Driver Information Centre.

Switching off the system

Press L, the speed limit indication

extinguishes in the Driver Information

Centre. The stored speed is deleted.

By pressing m to activate cruise

control or adaptive cruise control,

speed limiter is also deactivated and

the stored speed is deleted.

By switching off the ignition, speed

limiter is also deactivated, but the

speed limit will be stored for next

speed limiter activation.

Adaptive cruise control

Adaptive cruise control is an

enhancement to conventional cruise

control with the additional feature of

maintaining a certain distance behind

the vehicle ahead.

Adaptive cruise control automatically

decelerates the vehicle when

approaching a slower moving vehicle.

It then adjusts the vehicle speed to

follow the vehicle ahead at the

selected following distance. The

vehicle speed increases or decreases

to follow the vehicle in front, but will

not exceed the set speed. It may

apply limited braking with activated

brake lights.

To facilitate overtaking a vehicle on

the motorway, the activation of the

turn lights reduces the following

distance for a short time. This function

is implemented only on the respective

driver's side depending on left or right

hand drive vehicle configuration.

The adaptive cruise control can store

set speed over 19 mph. On vehicles

with automatic transmissions the

system can brake until a full stop and

drive off from a stop.

Driving and operating 181

Adaptive cruise control uses radar

and camera sensors to detect the

vehicles ahead. If no vehicle is

detected in the driving path, the

adaptive cruise control will behave

like a conventional cruise control

3 177.

For additional information including a

video, visit us online.

Adaptive cruise control is mainly

advised to be used on long straight

roads like highways or country roads

with steady traffic. Do not use the

system if it is not advisable to

maintain a constant speed.

Control indicator A 3 110, C 3 109.

Additionally, the status of the

adaptive cruise control is indicated on

the Driver Assistance page in the

Driver Information Center 3 110.

9Warning

The complete driver attention is

always required while driving with

adaptive cruise control. The driver

stays fully in control of the vehicle

because the brake pedal, the

accelerator pedal and the cancel

switch have priority over any

adaptive cruise control operation.

Switching on the system

Press v to switch on adaptive cruise

control. C appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

If the system is switched on but

inactive, a white bar in the set gap

position appears in front of the vehicle

symbol.

Activation of the functionality by

setting the speed

Adaptive cruise control can be

activated at speeds above 15 mph on

vehicles with automatic transmission

or 19 mph on vehicles with manual

transmission. The upper speed limit is

112 mph.

182 Driving and operating

Accelerate to the desired speed and

move thumb wheel to SET/-, the

current speed is stored and

maintained.

The adaptive cruise control symbol

C, the following distance setting and

set speed are indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

The accelerator pedal can be

released. Adaptive cruise control

remains activated during gear

shifting.

Overriding set speed

It is always possible to drive faster

than the selected set speed by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

When the accelerator pedal is

released, the vehicle returns to the

desired distance if a slower vehicle is

ahead. Otherwise it returns to the

stored speed.

Once the system is activated,

adaptive cruise control decelerates or

brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead,

which is slower or closer than the

desired following distance.

9Warning

Accelerating by the driver

deactivates automatic braking by

the system. This is indicated as a

pop-up warning in the Driver

Information Centre or by the

adaptive cruise control symbol

turning blue.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

As long as the set speed is

overridden, the bars in front of the

vehicle symbol appear blue.

Increase or reduce speed

The preset speed can be changed by

moving thumb wheel to RES/+ to

increase or SET/- to decrease the

speed. Move thumb wheel repeatedly

to change speed in small steps, move

and hold to change speed in large

steps.

Resume stored speed

If the system is switched on but

inactive and a speed was stored

before, turn thumb wheel to RES/+ at

a speed above 3 mph (with automatic

transmission) or above 19 mph (with

manual transmission) to resume the

stored speed.

Driving and operating 183

Full speed range adaptive cruise

control on vehicles with automatic

transmission

Full speed range adaptive cruise

control will maintain a following

distance behind a detected vehicle

and slow your vehicle to a stop behind

that vehicle.

When the vehicle ahead accelerates

after a brief stop, the adaptive cruise

control will drive off automatically

without driver action. If necessary,

press RES/+ or the accelerator pedal

to resume adaptive cruise control.

Pressing the accelerator pedal allows

more control over the acceleration

after driving off. Note that automatic

braking is disabled during usage of

the accelerator pedal.

If the stopped vehicle ahead was

stopped for a longer time and then

begins to move forward, the green

illuminated vehicle ahead control

indicator A will flash and a warning

chime will sound as a reminder to

check traffic before proceeding.

9Warning

When full speed range adaptive

cruise control is deactivated or

cancelled, the vehicle will no

longer be held at a stop and can

start moving. Always be prepared

to manually apply the brake pedal

to hold the vehicle stationary.

Do not leave the vehicle while it is

being held at a stop by the full

speed range adaptive cruise

control. Always move selector

lever to park position P and switch

off the ignition before leaving the

vehicle.

Setting the following distance

When adaptive cruise control detects

a slower moving vehicle in the driving

path, it will adjust the vehicle speed to

maintain the following distance

selected by the driver.

The following distance can be set to

near, medium or far.

Press K, the current setting is shown

in the Driver Information Centre.

Press K again to change the

following distance. The setting is also

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

184 Driving and operating

The selected following distance is

indicated by filled distance bars in the

adaptive cruise control page.

Note that the following distance

setting is shared with the sensitivity

setting of forward collision alert

3 189.

Example: If setting 3 (far) is selected,

then the driver is warned sooner

before a possible collision, also if

adaptive cruise control is inactive or

switched off.

9Warning

The Driver accepts full

responsibility to drive with the

appropriate following distance

based on traffic, weather, visibility

and regional regulation. Following

distance must be adjusted or the

system switched off when required

by the prevailing conditions.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

Adaptive cruise control in Sport

mode

On vehicles with Flex Ride driving

modes, the driver can slightly

increase the Adaptive cruise control

acceleration when Sport mode is

selected. This function can be

deactivated in the Flex Ride

visualisation menu 3 175.

Driving and operating 185

Detecting the vehicle ahead

The green illuminated vehicle ahead

control indicator A is displayed when

the system detects a vehicle in the

driving path. The range of the sensors

is between 25 and 150 m depending

on vehicle speed.

Forward collision alert 3 189.

If this symbol does not display, or

displays briefly, adaptive cruise

control will not respond to vehicles

ahead.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

If the system is active and a preceding

vehicle is detected, the bars in front of

the vehicle symbol appear green and

indicate set gap position.

Deactivation of the functionality

Adaptive cruise control is deactivated

by the driver when:

●y is pressed.

● Brake pedal is applied.

● Clutch pedal is depressed for

more than 4 seconds.

● Selector lever of automatic

transmission is moved to N.

The system is also automatically

deactivated when:

● Vehicle speed accelerates above

120 mph or slows down below

15 mph. Vehicles with automatic

transmission slows down to a

stop without deactivating within

5 minutes.

● The Traction Control system is

deactivated or operating.

● The Electronic Stability Control is

deactivated or operating.

● There is no traffic and nothing

detected on the road sides for

approx. 1 minute. In this case

there are no radar echoes and

the sensor may report that it is

blocked.

● The active emergency braking

system is applying the brakes.

● Driving on steep inclines.

● The radar sensor is blocked by

an ice or water film.

● A fault is detected in the radar,

camera, engine or brake system.

● The brakes need to cool down.

186 Driving and operating

Additionally, the system is

automatically deactivated on vehicles

with automatic transmission (full

speed range adaptive cruise control)

when:

● The incline uphill or downhill is

greater than 20%.

● The electric parking brake is

applied.

● The vehicle is being held to a stop

by the system for more than

5 minutes.

● The vehicle stops, the driver's

seat belt is unbuckled and the

driver's door is opened.

When adaptive cruise control is

deactivated, the control indicator C

changes from green to white and a

pop-up message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

The stored speed is maintained.

The stored speed is indicated in

brackets in the Driver Information

Centre when the system is

deactivated but not switched off.

The adaptive cruise control symbol

C changes from green to white when

the system is deactivated but not

switched off.

9Warning

When adaptive cruise control is

deactivated, the driver must take

over full brake and engine control

immediately.

Switching off the system

Press v to switch off adaptive cruise

control. The control indicator C

extinguishes in the Driver Information

Centre. The stored speed is deleted.

Switching off the ignition also

switches off adaptive cruise control

and deletes the stored speed.

Driver's attention

● Use adaptive cruise control

carefully on bends or mountain

roads, as it can lose the vehicle

ahead and needs time to detect it

again.

● Do not use the system on

slippery roads as it can create

rapid changes in tyre traction

(wheel spinning), so that you

could lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control during rain, snow or

heavy dirt, as the radar sensor

can be covered by a water film,

dust, ice or snow. This reduces or

suppresses completely the

visibility. In case of sensor

blockage, clean the sensor

cover.

Driving and operating 187

System limits

9Warning

The system's automatic brake

force does not permit hard braking

and the braking level may not be

sufficient to avoid a collision.

● After a sudden lane change, the

system needs a certain time to

detect the next preceding

vehicle. So if a new vehicle is

detected, the system may

accelerate instead of braking.

● Adaptive cruise control does

ignore the oncoming traffic.

● Adaptive cruise control does not

consider pedestrians and

animals for braking and driving

off.

● Adaptive cruise control considers

stopped vehicles only at low

speed.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control when towing a trailer.

● Do not use adaptive cruise

control on roads with an incline of

more than 10%.

Bends

The adaptive cruise control calculates

a predicted path based on the

centrifugal force. This predicted path

considers the current bend

characteristic, but cannot consider a

future bend change. The system may

lose the current vehicle ahead or

consider a vehicle which is not in the

actual lane. This can happen when

entering or exiting a bend or if the

bend gets stronger or weaker. The

camera applies a certain correction

based on the detectable lane

markings. The control indicator A will

extinguish, if a vehicle ahead is no

longer detected.

If the centrifugal force is too high in a

bend, the system slows down the

vehicle slightly. This braking level is

not designed to avoid spinning-off the

bend. The driver is responsible for

reducing the selected speed before

entering a bend and in general to

adapt the speed to the road type and

to existing speed limits.

Motorways

On motorways, adapt the set speed

to the situation and the weather.

Always consider that adaptive cruise

control has a limited visibility range, a

limited braking level and a certain

reaction time to verify if a vehicle is on

the driving path or not. Furthermore,

adaptive cruise control was designed

to brake as late as possible to allow

changing the lane before the

automatic braking. Adaptive cruise

control may not be able to brake the

vehicle in time to avoid a collision with

188 Driving and operating

a much slower vehicle or after a lane

change. This is particularly true while

driving fast or if the visibility is

reduced due to weather conditions.

While entering or exiting a motorway,

adaptive cruise control may lose the

vehicle ahead and accelerate up to

the set speed. For this reason,

decrease the set speed before the

exit or before the entry.

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your driving

path, adaptive cruise control will first

consider the vehicle when it is

completely in your path. Be ready to

take action and depress the brake

pedal, if you need to brake more

quickly.

Hill considerations

9Warning

Do not use adaptive cruise control

on steep hill roads.

System performance on hills depends

on vehicle speed, vehicle load, traffic

conditions and the road gradient. It

may not detect a vehicle in your path

while driving on hills. Full speed range

adaptive control is deactivated

automatically, as the vehicle is

stopping uphill on an incline greater

than 10%. In this condition, be

prepared to take control of the

vehicle.

Note that applying the brake

deactivates the system.

Radar unit

The radar unit is mounted behind the

radiator grille or below the brand

emblem.

9Warning

The radar unit was aligned

carefully during manufacture.

Therefore, in the event of a front-

end impact, do not use the system.

The front bumper may appear to

be intact, however the sensor

behind can be out of position and

react incorrectly. After an

Driving and operating 189

accident, consult a workshop to

verify and adjust the radar unit

position.

Settings

A vehicle message and chime

reminds the driver to drive off when

the adaptive cruise control holds the

vehicle at standstill. This function

named Go Notifier can be activated

and deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation menu in the Info

Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Fault

If the adaptive cruise control does not

work due to temporary conditions

(e.g. blockage by ice, overheated

brakes or low speed manoeuvres) or

if there is a permanent system error,

a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Forward collision alert

The forward collision alert is part of

the forward collision system 3 122. It

can help to avoid or reduce the harm

caused by front-end crashes.

A vehicle ahead is indicated by the

control indicator A.

Additionally, the status of the forward

collision alert is indicated on the

Driver Assistance page in the Driver

Information Center 3 110.

If the vehicle is equipped with

conventional cruise control, the

forward collision alert uses the front

camera in the windscreen to detect a

vehicle directly ahead, in your path.

If the vehicle is equipped with

adaptive cruise control, the forward

collision alert uses the radar sensor

and front camera to detect a vehicle

directly ahead, in your path.

Forward collision alert with front

camera detects vehicles to distances

of approx. 60 m and operates

automatically at all speeds above

walking speed.

Forward collision alert with radar

sensor detects vehicles to distances

of approx. 150 m and operates

automatically at all speeds above

walking speed.

Activation

A precondition is that forward collision

alert in the vehicle personalisation

menu is not deactivated 3 122.

Alerting the driver

The vehicle ahead control indicator

A illuminates green in the instrument

cluster when the system has detected

a vehicle in the driving path. On

vehicles with head-up display, A is

projected on the windscreen.

The control indicator A changes to

amber when the distance to a

preceding moving vehicle gets too

small.

Caution

The colour lighting of this control

indicator does not correspond to

local traffic laws on following

190 Driving and operating

distance. The driver bears full

responsibility for maintaining safe

following distance according to

applicable traffic rules, weather

and road conditions etc. at all

times.

When the time to a potential collision

with a vehicle in front gets too small

and a collision is imminent, the

collision alert symbol pops-up in the

Driver Information Centre and the

driver gets notified by a flashing red

LED stripe or the pop-up symbol in

the head-up display which is

projected on the windscreen in the

driver's field of view.

Simultaneously a warning chime

sounds. Depress the brake pedal and

steer the vehicle, if it is required by the

situation.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

A symbol of a preceding vehicle

appears in grey when a vehicle was

detected.

The symbol turns amber when the

distance gets too small.

The symbol turns red if a collision is

imminent.

Selecting the alert sensitivity

Press K to set the alert sensitivity to

near, medium or far.

Driving and operating 191

The first button press shows the

current setting on the Driver

Information Centre. Additional button

presses will change this setting. The

chosen setting will remain until it is

changed. The alert timing will vary

based on vehicle speed. The faster

the vehicle speed, the farther away

the alert will occur. Consider traffic

and weather conditions when

selecting the alert timing.

Note that the alert timing sensitivity

setting is shared with the following

distance setting of the adaptive cruise

control. So changing the alert timing

sensitivity changes the adaptive

cruise control following distance

setting.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

Deactivation

The system can be deactivated in the

personalisation menu 3 122.

If the forward collision alert was

deactivated, alert sensitivity is set to

"medium" when ignition is switched

on next time.

The last selected setting will be stored

when the ignition is switched off.

192 Driving and operating

General information

9Warning

Forward collision alert is just a

warning system and does not

apply the brakes. When

approaching a vehicle ahead too

rapidly, it may not provide you

enough time to avoid a collision.

The driver accepts full

responsibility for the appropriate

following distance based on traffic,

weather and visibility conditions.

The complete attention of the

driver is always required while

driving. The driver must always be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes.

System limitations

Forward collision alert is designed to

warn on vehicles only, but may react

also to other objects.

In the following cases, forward

collision alert may not detect a vehicle

ahead or sensor performance is

limited:

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● during nighttime driving

● weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

affected by foreign items, e.g.

stickers

Following distance

indication

The following distance indication

displays the distance to a preceding

moving vehicle. The front camera in

the windscreen and the Radar sensor

are used to detect the distance of a

vehicle directly ahead in the vehicle's

path. It is active at speeds above

25 mph.

When a preceding vehicle is detected

ahead, the distance is indicated in

seconds, displayed on a page in the

Driver Information Centre.

On Baselevel display, choose Info

Menu ? and choose following

distance indication page 3 110.

On Mid- and Uplevel display, select

Info menu via steering wheel buttons

and press å to select following

distance indication 3 110.

The minimum indicated distance is

0.5 seconds.

If there is no vehicle ahead or the

vehicle ahead is out of range, two

dashes will be displayed: -.- sec.

Driving and operating 193

If Adaptive cruise control is active,

this page shows the alert sensitivity

setting instead of following distance

setting 3 180.

System limitations

In the following cases, following

distance indication sensor

performance is limited:

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor is blocked by snow,

ice, slush, mud, dirt, windscreen

damage or affected by foreign

items, e.g. stickers.

Active emergency braking

Active emergency braking is part of

the forward collision system 3 122. It

can help to reduce the damage and

injury from crashes with vehicles,

pedestrians and obstacles directly

ahead, when a collision can no longer

be avoided either by manual braking

or by steering. Before the active

emergency braking applies, the driver

is warned by the Forward collision

alert 3 189 or the Front pedestrian

protection alert 3 196.

The feature uses various inputs (e.g.

camera sensor, radar sensor, brake

pressure, vehicle speed) to calculate

the probability of a frontal collision.

9Warning

This system is not intended to

replace the driver's responsibility

for driving the vehicle and looking

ahead. Its function is limited to

supplemental use only to reduce

the vehicle speed before a

collision.

The system may not react to

animals. After a sudden lane

change, the system needs a

certain time to detect the next

preceding vehicle.

The driver must always be ready

to take action and apply the brakes

and steer to avoid collisions.

Functionality

The system includes:

● brake preparation system

● emergency automatic braking

● forward looking brake assist

● intelligent brake assist (only with

radar sensor)

● front pedestrian protection

system

194 Driving and operating

If equipped only with front camera the

active emergency braking operates in

forward gear above walking speed up

to 50 mph.

If equipped with radar sensor, active

emergency braking operates in

forward gear at all speeds above

walking speed. Only front pedestrian

protection is active up to 50 mph.

Activation

A precondition is that Forward

Collision System and Front

pedestrian detection are not

deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation menu 3 122.

Brake preparation system

When approaching a vehicle ahead

or a pedestrian so quickly that a

collision is likely, the brake

preparation system slightly

pressurises the brakes. This reduces

the response time, when a manual or

automatic braking is requested.

Emergency automatic braking

After activation of brake preparation

system and just before the imminent

collision, this function automatically

applies limited braking to reduce the

impact speed of the collision or

prohibit a crash.

If active emergency braking is

applied, a message appears in the

Driver Information Center and a

chime sounds.

Depending on the situation, the

vehicle may automatically brake

moderately or hard. This front

automatic braking can only occur if a

vehicle ahead is detected, indicated

by the vehicle ahead indicator A

3 189. On vehicles with front

pedestrian protection, front automatic

braking can also occur when a

pedestrian ahead is detected.

Below a speed of 25 mph the system

can apply full braking.

Emergency automatic braking may

slow the vehicle to a complete stop to

try to avoid a potential crash. If this

happens, emergency automatic

braking may engage the electric

parking brake to hold the vehicle at a

stop. To release press the electric

parking brake button or firmly press

the accelerator pedal.

9Warning

Emergency automatic braking is

an emergency crash preparation

feature and is not designed to

avoid crashes. Do not rely on the

system to brake the vehicle.

Emergency automatic braking will

not brake outside of its operating

speed range and only responds to

detected vehicles and

pedestrians.

Forward looking brake assist

In addition to the brake preparation

system and emergency automatic

braking, the forward looking brake

assist function makes the brake assist

more sensitive. Therefore, pressing

the brake pedal less strongly results

in immediate hard braking. This

function helps the driver brake

quicker and harder before the

imminent collision.

Driving and operating 195

9Warning

Active emergency braking is not

designed to apply hard

autonomous braking or to

automatically avoid a collision. It is

designed to reduce the vehicle

speed before a collision. It may not

react to animals. After a sudden

lane change, the system needs a

certain time to detect the next

preceding vehicle.

The complete attention of the

driver is always required while

driving. The driver must always be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes and steer to avoid

collisions.

The system is designed to work with

all occupants wearing their seat belts.

Intelligent Brake Assist

If the vehicle is equipped with radar

sensor Intelligent brake assist may

activate when the brake pedal is

applied quickly by providing a boost

to braking based on the speed of

approach and distance to a vehicle

ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal

movement during this time is normal

and the brake pedal should continue

to be applied as needed. Intelligent

brake assist will automatically

disengage only when the brake pedal

is released.

9Warning

Intelligent brake assist may

increase vehicle braking in

situations when it may not be

necessary. You could block the

flow of traffic. If this occurs, take

your foot off the brake pedal and

then apply the brakes as needed.

Front pedestrian protection 3 196.

Deactivation

Active emergency braking can be

deactivated in the personalisation

menu 3 122. If deactivated a

message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

We recommend to deactivate the

system or set it to alert only in the

following cases:

● when the vehicle is being towed

● if a trailer is attached to the

vehicle

● before using an automatic car

wash with ignition switched on

● if the windscreen has been

damaged close to the camera

● if the front bumper has been

damaged

System limitations

In some cases, the active emergency

braking system may provide an

automatic braking in situations that

seem to be unnecessary, for instance

in parking garages, due to traffic signs

in a curve or due to vehicles in

another lane. This is normal

operation, the vehicle does not need

service. Firmly apply the accelerator

pedal to override the automatic

braking if the situation and the

surroundings permit.

196 Driving and operating

In the following cases, Active

emergency braking performance is

limited:

● riving on winding or hilly roads

● detecting all vehicles, especially

vehicles with a trailer, tractors,

muddy vehicles, etc.

● detecting a vehicle when weather

limits visibility, such as in fog,

rain, or snow

● during nighttime driving

● weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, etc.

● the windscreen is damaged or

affected by foreign objects, e.g.

stickers

To avoid malfunction keep the areas

of the camera sensor in the

windscreen and the radar sensor in

the radiator grille always clean from

dirt, dust, ice and snow.

Complete attention is always required

while driving, and you should be

ready to take action and apply the

brakes and / or steer the vehicle to

avoid crashes.

Fault

In case the system requires a service,

a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

If the system does not work as it

should do, vehicle messages are

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Front pedestrian protection

Front pedestrian protection may help

to avoid or reduce the harm caused

by front-end crashes with nearby

pedestrians when driving in a forward

gear.

The system uses the front camera in

the windscreen to detect a pedestrian

directly ahead, in your path.

Front pedestrian protection can

detect and alert to pedestrians in a

forward gear at speeds between

5 mph and 50 mph. Additionally Front

pedestrian protection can provide a

boost to braking or automatically

brake the vehicle.

During daytime driving, the system

detects pedestrians up to a distance

of approx. 40 m. During nighttime

driving, system performance is

limited.

Front pedestrian protection can be

set to Off, Alert, or Alert & Brake in

vehicle personalisation 3 122.

9Danger

Front pedestrian braking does not

provide an alert or automatically

brake the vehicle, unless it detects

a pedestrian.

The system may not detect

pedestrians, including children,

when the pedestrian is not directly

ahead, not fully visible, not

standing upright, or when part of a

group.

Driving and operating 197

Front pedestrian protection includes:

● detecting front pedestrian ahead

● front pedestrian alert

● automatic braking

Detecting front pedestrian ahead

A pedestrian ahead up to a distance

of approx. 40 m is indicated by the

control indicator 7 in the instrument

cluster. On vehicles with head-up

display, 7 is projected on the

windscreen.

Front pedestrian alert

When approaching a detected

pedestrian too quickly, the collision

alert symbol pops up in the Driver

Information Centre and the pop-up

symbol 7 in the head-up display is

projected on the windscreen in the

driver's field of view. A warning chime

is provided. The brake system may

prepare for driver braking to occur

more rapidly which can cause a brief,

mild deceleration. Continue to apply

the brake pedal as required.

Cruise control or Adaptive cruise

control may be disengaged when the

Front pedestrian alert occurs.

Automatic braking

If a crash into a pedestrian directly

ahead is imminent, and the brakes

have not been applied, Automatic

braking may automatically brake

moderately or brake hard. This can

help to avoid some very low speed

pedestrian crashes or reduce

pedestrian injury.

Automatic braking levels may be

reduced under certain conditions,

such as higher speeds.

If this happens, automatic braking

may engage the Electric parking

brake to hold the vehicle at a stop.

Release the parking brake. Pressing

the accelerator pedal will also release

Automatic braking and Electric

parking brake 3 170.

This system includes Intelligent brake

assist, and the Emergency automatic

braking system may also respond to

pedestrians.

Active emergency braking 3 193.

Automatic braking can be disabled in

the vehicle personalisation menu

3 122.

General information

9Warning

The driver must always be ready

to take action and apply the brakes

and steer to avoid collisions.

198 Driving and operating

9Warning

Front pedestrian braking may alert

or automatically brake the vehicle

suddenly in situations where it is

unexpected and undesired. It

could falsely alert or brake for

objects similar in shape or size to

pedestrians, including shadows.

This is normal operation and the

vehicle does not need a service.

To override Automatic braking,

firmly depress the accelerator

pedal, if it is safe to do so.

9Warning

Using the Front pedestrian braking

system while towing a trailer could

cause loss of vehicle control and

crash. Turn the system to Alert or

Off in the vehicle personalisation

when towing a trailer.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

System limitations

In the following cases, front

pedestrian protection may not detect

a pedestrian ahead or sensor

performance is limited:

● Vehicle speed is out of range

from 5 mph to 50 mph in forward

gear.

● The distance to an pedestrian

ahead is more than 40 m.

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

affected by foreign items, e.g.

stickers.

Parking assist

General information

When the trailer hitch is attached,

change the configuration settings in

the vehicle personalisation menu in

the Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

When attaching a trailer or bike

carrier to the trailer hitch, the parking

assist is deactivated.

Front-rear parking assist

9Warning

The driver bears full responsibility

for the parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding

area when driving backwards or

forwards while using parking

assist system.

The front-rear parking assist

measures the distance between the

vehicle and obstacles in front and

behind the vehicle. It informs and

warns the driver by giving acoustic

signals and display indication.

It uses two different acoustic warning

signals for the front and rear

monitoring areas, each with a

different tone frequency.

Driving and operating 199

The system has four ultrasonic

parking sensors each in the rear and

front bumper.

Activation

The system is activated automatically

at a speed up to 7 mph.

An illuminated LED in the parking

assist button r indicates that the

system is ready to operate.

If r is switched off within an ignition

cycle, the parking assist is

deactivated. If vehicle speed has

exceeded 15 mph beforehand,

parking assist will be reactivated

when speed drops below 7 mph.

When the system is deactivated, the

LED in the button extinguishes and a

message pops up in the Driver

Information Centre.

Indication

The system warns the driver with

acoustic signals against potentially

hazardous obstacles in front of the

vehicle in a distance range up to

80 cm and against potentially

hazardous obstacles behind the

vehicle in a distance range up to

50 cm while a forward gear is

engaged, or up to 1.5 m while reverse

gear is engaged.

Depending on which side of the

vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you

will hear acoustic warning signals in

the vehicle on the respective side.

The interval between the signals

becomes shorter as the vehicle gets

closer to that obstacle. When the

distance is less than approx. 30 cm,

the signal is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear and

front obstacles is displayed by

changing distance lines in the Driver

Information Centre 3 110 or,

depending on the version, on the Info

Display 3 116.

200 Driving and operating

The distance indication can be

inhibited by vehicle messages with a

higher priority. After dismissing the

message distance indication appears

again.

Acoustic signal is muted when

parking brake is engaged or the

selector lever of automatic

transmission is in N.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated

automatically when vehicle speed

exceeds 7 mph.

Manual deactivation is also possible

by pressing the parking assist button

When the system is deactivated

manually, the LED in the button

extinguishes and a message pops up

in the Driver Information Centre.

After a manual deactivation, the front-

rear parking assist is activated again

if r is pressed.

The complete system can be

manually deactivated in the vehicle

personalisation menu in the

Info Display. It remains deactivated

during the ignition cycle or until

activation in personalisation menu

again.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Fault

In the event of a fault or if the system

does not work temporarily, e.g.

because of high external noise level

or other interference factors, a

message pops-up in the Driver

Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Advanced parking assist

9Warning

The driver bears full responsibility

for accepting the parking slot

suggested by the system and the

parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding

area in all directions when using

the advanced parking assist.

The advanced parking assist

measures a suitable parking slot

while passing, calculates the

trajectory and automatically steers

the vehicle into a parallel or

perpendicular parking slot.

Instructions are given in the Driver

Information Centre 3 110 or,

depending on the version, on the Info

Display 3 116, supported by acoustic

signals.

The driver must control acceleration,

braking and gear shifting, while

steering is done automatically.

Driving and operating 201

GSi models only

In vehicles with automatic

transmission, the driver must control

acceleration and gear shifting, while

braking and steering is done

automatically.

Advanced parking assist is always

combined with front-rear parking

assist. Both systems use the same

sensors in the front and rear bumper.

The system has six ultrasonic parking

sensors each in both the rear and

front bumper.

Activation of advanced parking assist

Advanced parking assist can only be

activated when driving forwards.

When searching for a parking slot, the

system is ready to operate with a

short press of (.

The system recognises and

memorises 10 m for parallel parking

slots or 6 m for perpendicular parking

slots in the parking assist mode.

The system can only be activated and

searches for a parking slot at a speed

up to 18 mph.

Advanced parking assist may not be

activated when driving on very steep

inclines.

Functionality

Parking slot searching mode,

indication in the Driver Information

Centre

Select parallel or perpendicular

parking slot in Driver Information

Centre by long press on (.

The system is configured to detect

parking slots by default on the

passenger side. To detect parking

slots on the driver side, switch on turn

lights on the driver side.

202 Driving and operating

Indication in the Info Display

Select parallel or perpendicular

parking slot by tapping the respective

icon on the display.

Select parking side by tapping the

respective icon on the display.

When a slot is detected, a visual

feedback on the Info Display and an

acoustic signal is given.

If the driver does not stop the vehicle

after a parking slot is proposed, the

system starts to search for another

suitable parking slot.

Park guiding mode

The parking slot suggestion of the

system is accepted when the vehicle

is stopped by the driver within ten

metres for parallel parking slots or

six metres for perpendicular parking

slots after the message to stop the car

is indicated. The system calculates

the optimal path into the parking slot.

A brief vibration in the steering wheel

after engaging reverse gear indicates

that the steering is controlled by the

system. Then the vehicle with manual

transmission is steered into the slot

automatically by giving the driver

detailed instructions for braking,

accelerating and gear shifting. With

automatic transmission the vehicle is

steered into the slot automatically by

giving the driver detailed instructions

for accelerating and shifting forward

or reversing. The driver must keep

hands away from the steering wheel.

During park guiding mode the

manoeuvring speed is limited.

Always pay attention to the signals of

the front-rear parking assist.

Continuous signal indicates that the

distance to an obstacle is less than

approx. 30 cm.

If, for any reason, the driver must take

over control of the steering, hold the

steering wheel only at the outer edge.

Automatic steering is cancelled in this

event.

Driving and operating 203

Display indication

The instructions on the display show:

● General hints and warning

messages.

● A hint when driving faster than

18 mph during parking slot

searching mode.

● The demand to stop the vehicle,

when a parking slot is detected.

● The direction of driving during the

parking manoeuvre.

● The demand to shift into reverse

or first gear, or R or D with

automatic transmission.

● The demand to stop or to drive

slowly.

● For some of the instructions a

progress bar is shown in the

Driver Information Centre.

● The successful completion of the

parking manoeuvre indicated by

a pop-up symbol and a chime.

● The cancelling of a parking

manoeuvre.

Display priorities

Advanced parking assist indication in

the Driver Information Centre can be

inhibited by vehicle messages with a

higher priority. After approving the

message 9 on the steering wheel,

advanced parking assist instructions

appear again and the parking

manoeuvre can be continued.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated by:

● a short press of (

● parking manoeuvre successfully

ended

● driving faster than 18 mph during

parking slot search

● driving faster than 5 mph during

parking guidance

● driver interference on steering

wheel detected

● steep hill incline detected

● exceeding maximum number of

gear changes: eight cycles when

parallel parking or five cycles

when perpendicular parking

● switching off the ignition

Deactivation by the driver or by the

system during manoeuvring will be

indicated by a message on the

display. Additionally, an acoustic

signal sounds.

Automatic transmission:

If advanced park assist is deactivated

during the parking manoeuvre or

manoeuvre is finished successfully,

the assist holds the vehicle in position

until one of the following conditions

occurs:

1. brake pedal is applied

2. electric parking brake is activated

3. selector lever is set to P

Fault

A message appears when:

● There is a fault in the system.

● The driver did not successfully

complete the parking

manoeuvre.

● The system is not operational.

● Any of the deactivation reasons

described above apply.

204 Driving and operating

If an object is detected during parking

instructions, a message to stop the

vehicle is indicated. Removing the

object will resume the parking

manoeuvre. If the object is not

removed, the system will be

deactivated.

Basic notes on parking assist

systems

9Warning

Under certain circumstances,

various reflective surfaces on

objects or clothing as well as

external noise sources may cause

the system to fail to detect

obstacles.

Caution

Performance of the system can be

reduced when sensors are

covered, e.g. by ice or snow.

Performance of the parking assist

system can be reduced due to

heavy loading.

Special conditions apply if there

are taller vehicles in the vicinity

(e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans,

vans). Object identification and

correct distance indication in the

upper part of these vehicles

cannot be guaranteed.

Objects with a very small reflection

cross-section, e.g. objects of

narrow size or soft materials, may

not be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do not

detect objects outside the

detection range.

Notice

It is possible that the sensor detects

a non-existing object caused by

echo disturbance from external

acoustic noise or mechanical

misalignments (sporadic false

warnings may occur).

Make sure that the front number

plate is properly mounted (not bent

and no gaps to the bumper on the left

or right side) and the sensors are

firmly in place.

Advanced parking assist system

may not respond to changes in the

available parking space after

initiating a parking manoeuvre. The

system may recognize an entry, a

gateway, a courtyard or even a

crossing as a parking slot. After

selecting reverse gear the system

will start a parking manoeuvre. Take

care regarding the availability of the

suggested parking slot.

Low curbs and surface irregularities,

e.g. on construction zones, are not

detected by the system. The driver

accepts responsibility.

Notice

New vehicles require a calibration

during first use. For optimal parking

guidance, a driving distance of at

least 6 miles, including a number of

bends, is required.

System is calibrated to factory-fitted

wheels. Parking performance is

altered with other tyre or wheels

sizes.

Driving and operating 205

Side blind spot alert

The Side blind spot alert system

detects and reports objects on either

side of the vehicle, within a specified

"blind spot" zone. The system

displays a visual alert in each exterior

mirror, when detecting objects that

may not be visible in the interior and

exterior mirrors.

The radar distance sensors are

located in the rear bumper.

9Warning

Side blind spot alert does not

replace driver vision.

The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blind

zones which may be rapidly

approaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animals

Before changing a lane, always

check all mirrors, look over the

shoulder and use the turn lights.

When the vehicle is started, both

exterior mirror displays will briefly

illuminate to indicate that the system

is operating.

When the system detects a moving

vehicle in the side blind spot while

driving forwards, either while passing

a vehicle or being passed, a yellow

warning symbol F will illuminate in

the relevant exterior mirror. If the

driver then activates the turn lights,

the warning symbol F starts

flashing yellow as a warning not to

change lanes.

Side blind spot alert is active at any

speed.

Deactivation

Activation or deactivation of the Side

blind zone alert can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Info Display 3 116.

Deactivation is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre.

System limitations

Occasional missed alerts can occur

under normal circumstances or in

sharp curves. The system can

temporarily alert of objects in the blind

spot at specific weather conditions

(rain, hail etc). Driving on a wet road

or in the transitions from a dry area to

a wet area can cause the control

indicator F to light up, as water

splash can be interpreted as an

object. Otherwise the control indicator

F may illuminate due to guardrails,

signs, trees, shrubs or other immobile

objects. This is normal operation and

the system does not need to be

serviced.

206 Driving and operating

The system may not operate properly

when:

● Ice, snow, mud, stickers,

magnets, metal plates, or

anything else covers the sensors.

● Driving in heavy rainstorms.

● The vehicle had an accident or if

the area surrounding the

detection sensor is damaged or

not properly repaired.

● There are extreme temperature

changes.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer

In the event of a fault in the system or

if the system does not work due to

temporary conditions, a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Notice

Each new vehicle requires a

calibration. For optimal

performance, drive as soon as

possible on a straight motorway

road with roadside objects, e.g.

guardrails and barriers for some

distance.

Lane change alert

Additional to the side blind spot alert

3 205, lane change alert recognises

rapidly approaching vehicles from

behind on parallel lanes next to your

vehicle.

The system alerts visually in each

exterior mirror when detecting rapidly

approaching vehicles from behind.

The radar distance sensors are

located in the rear bumper.

9Warning

Lane change alert does not

replace driver vision.

Before changing a lane, always

check all mirrors, look over the

shoulder and use the turn light.

When the system detects an

approaching vehicle from behind

which drives considerably faster, the

yellow warning symbol F will

illuminate in the relevant exterior

mirror. If the driver then activates the

turn lights, the warning symbol F

starts flashing yellow as a warning not

to change lanes.

Lane change alert is active at all

speeds.

When the vehicle is started, both

exterior mirror displays will briefly

come on to indicate that the system is

operating.

Driving and operating 207

Detection zones

The system sensors cover a zone of

approx. 3.5 m parallel on both vehicle

sides and approx. 3 m rearwards on

side blind zone alert (A) and approx.

50 m rearwards on lane change alert

(B) on parallel lanes. The zones start

at each exterior mirror. The height of

the zone is approx. between 0.5 m

and 2 m off the ground.

Deactivation

Activation or deactivation of the lane

change alert can be set in the vehicle

personalisation menu in the Info

Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Info Display 3 116.

Deactivation is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre.

System limitations

Occasional missed alerts can occur

under normal circumstances or in

sharp curves. The system can

temporarily alert of objects in the blind

spot at specific weather conditions

(rain, hail etc). Driving on a wet road

or in the transitions from a dry area to

a wet area can cause the control

indicator F to light up, as water

splash can be interpreted as an

object. Otherwise the control indicator

F may illuminate due to guardrails,

signs, trees, shrubs or other immobile

objects. This is normal operation and

the system does not need to be

serviced.

The system may not operate properly

when:

● ice, snow, mud, stickers,

magnets, metal plates, or

anything else covers the sensors

● driving in heavy rainstorms

● the vehicle had an accident or if

the area surrounding the

detection sensor is damaged or

not properly repaired

● there are extreme temperature

changes

● the vehicle is towing a trailer

In the event of a fault in the system or

if the system does not work due to

temporary conditions, a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Notice

Each new vehicle requires a

calibration. For optimal

performance, drive as soon as

possible on a straight motorway

road with roadside objects, e.g.

guardrails and barriers for some

distance.

208 Driving and operating

Panoramic view system

This system allows views of the

vehicle's surroundings to be

displayed as a nearly 360° picture in

the Info Display, like a bird's eye view.

The system uses four cameras:

● rear camera, installed in the

tailgate

● front camera, installed in the front

grill below the emblem

● side cameras, located at the

bottom of both exterior mirrors

The screen in the Info Display is

divided into two parts: on the left there

is a view from above the vehicle, and

on the right there is the view from front

or the rear displayed, according to the

gear engaged. The parking sensors

complete the information on the view.

Activation

Panoramic view system can be

activated by touching d in the Info

Display. It may be neccessary to slide

to the next page on the home menu

to find.

Functionality

Rear view

Rear view displays an image of the

area behind the vehicle on the right

part of the screen when reverse gear

is engaged or by touching d first

and e second.

A warning triangle 9 may be

displayed on the screen when

obstacles are detected by the rear

sensors of the parking assist. This

triangle changes from yellow to red

and increases in size the closer the

object gets.

The previous content of the Info

Display appears when the vehicle is

shifted out of reverse gear after a

short delay. To return to the previous

display content sooner, press the

camera icon in the Info Display.

Driving faster than 7 mph in a forward

gear will deactivate the panoramic

system also.

Surround view

Surround view displays an image of

the area surrounding the vehicle from

above, along with the front or rear

camera views in the Info Display.

Front view

Front view displays an image of the

area in front of the vehicle on the right

part of the screen. The view displays

after shifting from reverse gear to a

forward gear, or by touching d in the

Info Display. Front view also displays

objects automatically detected within

30 cm. The front view is only

displayed up to a speed of 7 mph in a

forward gear.

Driving and operating 209

Deactivation

Panoramic view system is

deactivated:

● driving faster than 7 mph

● press (

General information

9Warning

The panoramic view system does

not replace driver vision. It will not

display children, pedestrians,

cyclists, crossing traffic, animals,

or any other objects outside of the

camera view areas, e. g. below the

bumper, or underneath the

vehicle.

Do not drive or park the vehicle

using only the panoramic view

system.

Always check the surrounding of

the vehicle before driving.

9Warning

Displayed images may be further

or closer than they appear. The

area displayed is limited and

objects that are close to either

edge of the bumper or under the

bumper are not displayed on the

screen.

9Warning

The panoramic view cameras

have blind spot areas and will not

display all objects near the edges

of the vehicle. Folding side mirrors

that are out of position will not

display the panoramic view

correctly.

Blind spots are represented as

hatched areas in the illuminations.

Dark areas show the views displayed

by the panoramic view system.

210 Driving and operating

System limitations

Caution

For optimal operation of the

system, it is important to keep the

lenses of the cameras in the front

grille, the housings of outside

mirrors and in the tailgate between

the number plate lights always

clean. Rinse the lenses with water

and wipe with a soft cloth.

Do not clean the lenses with a

steam-jet or high-pressure jet

cleaner.

The panoramic view system may not

operate properly when:

● The surrounding is dark.

● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly into

the camera lenses.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The camera lenses are blocked

by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

● The vehicle had an accident.

● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Rear view camera

The rear view camera assists the

driver when reversing by displaying a

view of the area behind the vehicle.

The view of the camera is displayed

in the Info Display.

9Warning

The rear view camera does not

replace driver vision. Note that

objects that are outside the

camera's field of view and the

parking assist sensors, e.g. below

the bumper or underneath the

vehicle, are not displayed.

Do not reverse or park the vehicle

using only the rear view camera.

Always check the surrounding of

the vehicle before driving.

Activation

Rear view camera is automatically

activated when reverse gear is

engaged.

Functionality

The camera is mounted between the

number plate lights.

The area displayed by the camera is

limited. The distance of the image that

appears on the display differs from

the actual distance.

Driving and operating 211

Guidelines

Dynamic guidelines are horizontal

lines at one metre intervals projected

onto the picture to define the distance

to displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle is

shown in accordance with the

steering angle.

Warning symbols

Warning symbols are indicated as

triangles 9 on the picture, which show

obstacles detected by the rear

sensors of the advanced parking

assist.

Additionally 9 appears on the top line

of the Info Display with the warning to

check the vehicle surrounding.

Deactivation

The camera is switched off when a

certain forward speed is exceeded or

if reverse gear is not engaged for

approx. 10 seconds.

Deactivation of guidelines and

warning symbols

Multimedia Navi: Activation or

deactivation of the visual guiding lines

and the warning symbols can be

changed via touch buttons in the

lower zone of the display.

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro:

Activation or deactivation of the visual

guiding lines and the warning

symbols can be changed in the

Settings menu in the Info Display.

Select the relevant setting in Settings

I Rear Camera.

Info Display 3 116.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

System limitations

The rear view camera may not

operate properly when:

● The surrounding is dark.

● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly into

the camera lenses.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The camera lenses are blocked

by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.

Clean the lense, rinse with water,

and wipe with a soft cloth.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

212 Driving and operating

● The vehicle had a rear end

accident.

● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Fault messages are displayed with a

9 on the top line of the Info Display.

Rear cross traffic alert

Additional to the rear view camera

3 210, rear cross traffic alert warns of

cross traffic from left or right side

when driving rearwards. When cross

traffic is recognized and the rear view

camera is activated, a warning

triangle with a direction arrow K

appears on the Info Display, showing

the direction of the traffic.

Furthermore, three beeps will sound

from the speaker on the respective

side.

The radar distance sensors are

located in the rear bumper.

9Warning

The rear cross traffic alert does not

replace driver vision. Note that

objects that are outside sensors,

e.g. below the bumper or

underneath the vehicle, are not

displayed.

Pedestrians, children or animals

are not detected.

Do not reverse the vehicle by only

looking at the Info Display and

check the surrounding behind and

around the vehicle before

reversing.

Activation

Rear cross traffic alert is

automatically activated together with

the rear view camera when reverse

gear is engaged.

Detection zones

The system sensors cover a zone of

approx. 20 m at 90° to the left or right

side behind the vehicle. Rear cross

Driving and operating 213

traffic alert is active up to 6 mph and

alerts about crossing vehicles moving

with up to 22 mph.

Deactivation

Rear cross traffic alert is deactivated

together with the rear view camera

when a certain forward speed is

exceeded or if reverse gear is not

engaged for approx. 10 seconds.

Activation or deactivation of the rear

cross traffic alert can be set in the

vehicle personalisation menu in the

Info Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 122.

Info Display 3 116.

The system is deactivated if the

vehicle is towing a trailer.

Deactivation is indicated by a

message in the Driver Information

Centre.

System limitations

The system may not operate properly

when:

● ice, snow, mud, stickers,

magnets, metal plates, or

anything else covers the sensors

● driving in heavy rainstorms

● the vehicle had an accident or if

the area surrounding the

detection sensor is damaged or

not properly repaired

● there are extreme temperature

changes

● the vehicle is towing a trailer

In the event of a fault in the system or

if the system does not work due to

temporary conditions, a message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. Seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Traffic sign assistant

Functionality

Traffic sign assistant detects

designated traffic signs via a front

camera and displays them in the

Driver Information Centre.

If the vehicle is equipped with an

embedded navigation system, traffic

signs from data maps may be

included additionally.

Traffic signs, which will be detected,

are:

214 Driving and operating

Limit and no passing signs

● speed limit

● no passing

● end of speed limit

● end of no passing

Road signs

Beginning and end of:

● city regions (country-specific)

● motorways

● A-roads

● play streets

Add on signs

● additional hints to traffic signs

● restriction of trailer towing

● tractor constraints

● wet warning

● ice warning

● time constraints

● distance constraints

● direction arrows

Speed limit signs and no passing

signs are displayed in the Driver

Information Centre until the next

speed limit sign or end of speed limit

is detected or up to a defined sign

timeout.

Indication of multiple signs on the

display is possible.

An exclamation mark in a frame

indicates that there is an additional

sign detected which cannot be clearly

identified by the system.

The system operates without loss of

performance up to a speed of

125 mph depending on the lighting

conditions. At night the system is

active up to a speed of 100 mph.

Display indication

Information about the currently valid

traffic signs is available on the

designated traffic sign assistant page

in the Driver Information Centre.

Additionally, the currently valid speed

limit is displayed permanently in the

lower line of the Driver Information

Centre. In case a speed limit with add

on sign is available, a + symbol is

displayed in this area.

Driving and operating 215

Choose Info, " or ? Menu via right

steering wheel buttons and select

traffic sign assistant page 3 110.

When another page on the Driver

Information Centre menu was

selected and then traffic sign

assistant page is chosen again, the

last recognised traffic sign will be

displayed.

Alert function

The alert function can be activated or

deactivated in the setting menu of the

traffic sign assistant page.

Once activated and when the traffic

sign detection page is currently not

displayed, newly detected speed limit

and no passing signs are displayed

as pop-up alerts in the Driver

Information Centre.

On Baselevel Display, when traffic

sign assistant page is displayed,

press Å on the steering wheel

controls.

216 Driving and operating

Select Alerts ON or Alerts OFF.

On Uplevel Display, when traffic sign

assistant page is displayed, press

Å on the steering wheel controls.

Activate alerts by setting J,

deactivate alerts by setting I.

System reset

The content of the traffic sign display

can be cleared in the setting menu of

the traffic sign assistant page by

selecting Reset and confirm by

pressing 9 on the steering wheel

controls.

Alternatively, 9 can be pressed for

3 seconds to clear the content of the

page.

Upon successful reset, a chime will

sound and the following “Default

Sign” is indicated until the next traffic

sign is detected or provided by map

data of the navigation system.

In some cases, traffic sign assistant is

cleared up automatically by the

system.

Clearing of traffic signs

There are different scenarios that

lead to clearing the currently

displayed traffic signs. After clearing,

the “Default Sign” or a sign from

navigation map data is displayed in

the Driver Information Centre.

Reasons for signs being cleared:

● A predefined distance was driven

or time has elapsed (differs for

each sign type)

● Vehicle drives through a turn

● If no navigation map data is

available and speed drops below

32 mph (city entry detection)

● If navigation map data is

available and a city entry / exit

was detected due to map data

change

Traffic sign detection in

conjunction with navigation

system

If the vehicle is equipped with a

navigation system, the currently

displayed sign can either originate

from optical sign detection or from the

map data.

If the currently displayed sign

originates from map data and the map

information changes, a new sign will

be displayed. This may lead to

detection of a new sign although no

sign on the road may have been

passed.

Driving and operating 217

System limitations

Traffic sign assistant may not operate

properly when:

● Vehicle speed is faster than

125 mph.

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.

● During nighttime driving.

● The area of the windscreen,

where the front camera is

located, is not clean or affected

by foreign items, e.g. stickers.

● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.

● The sun is shining directly into

the camera lens.

● Traffic signs are completely or

partially covered or difficult to

discern.

● Traffic signs are incorrectly

mounted or damaged.

● Traffic signs do not comply with

the Vienna Convention on Road

Signs and Signals.

● The navigation map data is

outdated.

Caution

The system is intended to help the

driver within a defined speed

range to discern certain traffic

signs. Do not ignore traffic signs

which are not displayed by the

system.

The system does not discern any

other than the conventional traffic

signs that might give or end a

speed limit.

Do not let this special feature

tempt you into taking risks when

driving.

Always adapt speed to the road

conditions.

The driver assistance systems do

not relieve the driver from full

responsibility for vehicle

operation.

Lane keep assist

Lane keep assist helps to avoid

crashes due to unintentional lane

departures. The front camera

observes the lane markings between

which the vehicle is driving. If the

vehicle approaches a lane marking,

the steering wheel is gently turned to

position the vehicle back into the lane.

Turn steering wheel in same

direction, if system steering is not

sufficient. Turn steering wheel gently

into opposite direction, if lane change

is intended.

When crossing a lane marking

significantly, lane keep assist starts a

visual and acoustic warning.

Additionally, the status of the lane

keep assist is indicated on the Driver

Assistance page in the Driver

Information Center 3 110.

Unintended lane departure is

assumed

● without using turn lights

● using the turn lights in the

opposite direction of the lane

departure

● without braking

● without acceleration

● without active steering.

218 Driving and operating

Notice

The system is switched off during

detection of ambiguous lane

markings, e.g. in construction areas.

Notice

The system may be switched off if it

detects lanes which are too narrow,

too wide or too curved.

Activation

The lane keep assist is activated by

pressing a. The LED in the button

illuminates to indicate that the system

is switched on.

When the control indicator a in the

instrument cluster or in the head-up

display illuminates green, the system

is ready to assist.

The system is operational at vehicle

speeds between 37 mph and

112 mph and if lane markings are

available.

The system gently turns the steering

wheel and the control indicator a

changes to yellow, if the vehicle

approaches a detected lane marking

without using the turn lights in that

direction.

The system alerts by flashing a

together with three chimes, from the

respective direction, if the lane is

departed significantly.

The system is only operable when a

lane marking is detected.

If the system only detects lane

markings on one side of the road, it

will only assist for this side.

Lane keep assist detects hands-free

driving. In this case a message in the

Driver Information Centre pops-up

and a chime sounds as long as lane

keep assist detects hands-free

driving.

Indication on Driver Assistance page

If the system is active but one or both

lanes are not detected, they appear

as a line of hollow dashes, as shown

on the right side of the vehicle in the

graphic above.

Driving and operating 219

If the system detects a lane, it

appears as a green dashed line, as

shown on the right side of the vehicle

in the graphic above. This dashed line

becomes amber if the vehicle

approaches a detected lane marking

without the turn lights in that direction

has been used.

If the system intervenes by steering,

a short amber line appears, as shown

on the left side of the vehicle in the

graphic above.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated by

pressing a; the LED in the button

extinguishes.

The system is deactivated

automatically when a trailer is

detected.

System limitations

The system performance may not

operate properly when:

● vehicle speed is out of range from

37 to 112 mph

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● during nighttime driving

● weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,

dirt, windscreen damage or

affected by foreign items, e.g.

stickers

● the sun is shining directly into the

camera lens

● close vehicles ahead

● banked roads

● road edges

● roads with poor lane markings

● sudden lighting changes

● vehicle modifications, e.g. tyres

Switch off the system if the system is

disturbed by tar marks, shadows,

road cracks, temporary or

construction lane markings, or other

road imperfections.

9Warning

Always keep your attention on the

road and maintain proper vehicle

position within the lane, otherwise

vehicle damage, injury or death

could occur.

Lane keep assist does not

continuously steer the vehicle.

The system may not keep the

vehicle in the lane or give an alert,

even if a lane marking is detected.

The steering of the lane keep

assist may not be sufficient to

avoid a lane departure.

The system may not detect hands-

off driving due to external

influences (road condition and

surface, weather etc). The driver

has full responsibility to control the

vehicle and is always required to

keep the hands on the steering

wheel while driving.

Using the system while towing a

trailer or on slippery roads could

cause loss of control of the vehicle

and a crash. Switch the system off.

220 Driving and operating

Fuel

Fuel for petrol engines

Only use unleaded fuel that complies

with European standard EN 228 or

equivalent.

The engine is capable of running with

fuel that contains up to 10% ethanol

(e.g. named E10).

Use fuel with the recommended

octane rating. A lower octane rating

can reduce engine power and torque

and slightly increases fuel

consumption.

Caution

Do not use fuel or fuel additives

that contain metallic compounds

such as manganese-based

additives. This may cause engine

damage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply to

EN 228 or equivalent can lead to

deposits or engine damage.

Caution

Use of fuel with a lower octane

rating than the lowest possible

rating could lead to uncontrolled

combustion and engine damage.

The engine specific requirements

regarding octane rating are given in

the engine data overview 3 284. A

country-specific label at the fuel filler

flap can supersede the requirement.

Fuel additive

Fuel should contain detergent

additives that help prevent engine

and fuel system deposits from

forming. Clean fuel injectors and

intake valves will allow the emission

control system to work properly. In

certain countries fuel does not

contain sufficient quantities of

additive to keep fuel injectors and

intake valves clean. In these

countries a fuel additive is required for

some engines to make up for this lack

of detergency. Only use fuel additive

approved for the vehicle.

Adding fuel additive to the filled fuel

tank is required at least every

10,000 miles or after one year,

whichever occurs first. For further

information, contact your workshop.

Prohibited fuels

Fuels containing oxygenates such as

ethers and ethanol, as well as

reformulated fuel, are available in

some cities. If these fuels comply with

the previously described

specification, then they are

acceptable to use. However, E85

Driving and operating 221

(85% ethanol) and other fuels

containing more than 15% ethanol

must be used only in FlexFuel

vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containing

methanol. It can corrode metal

parts in the fuel system and also

damage plastic and rubber parts.

This damage would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.

Some fuels, mainly high octane

racing fuels, can contain an octane

enhancing additive called

methylcyclopentadienyl manganese

tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use fuels or

fuel additives with MMT as they can

reduce spark plug life and affect

emission control system

performance. The malfunction

indicator light Z may illuminate

3 105. If this occurs, seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Fuel for diesel engines

Only use diesel fuel that complies

with EN 590 and which has a sulphur

concentration of max. 10 ppm.

Fuels with a biodiesel (compliant with

EN 14214) content of max. 7% by

volume may be used (e.g. named

B7).

If travelling in countries outside the

European Union occasional use of

Euro-Diesel fuel with a sulphur

concentration below 50 ppm is

possible.

Caution

Frequent usage of diesel fuel

containing more than 15 ppm

sulphur will cause severe engine

damage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply to

EN 590 or similar can lead to

engine powerloss, increased wear

or engine damage and may affect

your warranty.

Do not use marine diesel oils, heating

oils, Aquazole and similar diesel-

water emulsions. Diesel fuels must

not be diluted with fuels for petrol

engines.

Low temperature operation

At temperatures below 0 °C, some

diesel products with biodiesel blends

may clog, freeze or gel, which may

affect the fuel supply system. Starting

and engine operation may not work

properly. Make sure to fill winter

grade diesel fuel at ambient

temperatures below 0 °C.

Arctic grade diesel fuel can be used

in extreme cold temperatures below

-20 °C. Using this fuel grade in warm

or hot climates is not recommended

222 Driving and operating

and may cause engine stalling, poor

starting or damage on the fuel

injection system.

Refuelling

9Danger

Before refuelling, switch off

ignition and any external heaters

with combustion chambers.

Follow the operating and safety

instructions of the filling station

when refuelling.

9Danger

Fuel is flammable and explosive.

No smoking. No naked flames or

sparks.

If you can smell fuel in your

vehicle, have the cause of this

remedied immediately by a

workshop.

A label with symbols at the fuel filler

flap is indicating the allowed fuel

types. In Europe the pump nozzles of

the filling stations are marked with

these symbols. Refuel only the

allowed fuel type.

Caution

In case of misfuelling, do not

switch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at right rear

side of vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be opened

if the vehicle is unlocked. Release the

fuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

Petrol and Diesel refuelling

Driving and operating 223

Place the nozzle in straight position to

the filler neck and press with slight

force to insert.

To refuel, switch on pump nozzle.

After the automatic cut-off, the tank

can be topped up by operating the

pump nozzle a maximum of two more

times.

Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuel

immediately.

Close the flap and allow it to engage.

Misfuel inhibitor

9Warning

Do not try to open the flap of the

fuel filler neck manually on

vehicles with misfuel inhibitor.

Disregarding this could lead to

trapping of the fingers.

The misfuel inhibitor ensures that the

flap of the fuel filler neck can only be

opened by using the suitable fuel

nozzle or a funnel for emergency

refilling.

In case of an emergency, refill with a

canister. A funnel must be used to

open the cap of the filler neck.

The funnel may be stowed in the load

compartment or the glovebox.

Place the funnel in straight position to

the filler neck and press with slight

force to insert.

After topping-up, clean funnel from

fuel remains and stow it away.

224 Driving and operating

Trailer hitch

General information

The factory-fitted towing equipment is

folded up under the rear bumper

fascia.

Entrust retrofitting of towing

equipment to a workshop. It may be

necessary to make changes that

affect the cooling system, heat

shields or other equipment. Only use

towing equipment that has been

approved for your vehicle.

To avoid vehicle damage, the power

tailgate cannot be operated with the

radio remote control when a trailer is

electrically connected.

The bulb outage detection function for

trailer brake light cannot detect a

partial bulb outage. E.g. in case of

four bulbs with a power of 5 W each,

the function only detects light outage

when only a single 5 W bulb remains

or none remain.

Fitting of towing equipment could

cover the opening of the towing eye.

If this is the case use the coupling ball

bar for towing.

Driving characteristics and

towing tips

Before attaching a trailer, lubricate

the coupling ball. However, do not do

so if a stabiliser, which acts on the

coupling ball, is being used to reduce

snaking movements.

During trailer towing do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph. A maximum speed

of 60 mph is only appropriate if an

oscillation damper is used and the

permissible gross trailer weight does

not exceed the vehicle's kerb weight.

For trailers with low driving stability

and caravan trailers, the use of an

oscillation damper is strongly

recommended.

If the trailer starts snaking, drive more

slowly, do not attempt to correct the

steering and brake sharply if

necessary.

When driving downhill, drive in the

same gear as if driving uphill and

drive at a similar speed.

Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load 3 291.

Trailer towing

Trailer loads

The permissible trailer loads are

vehicle and engine-dependent

maximum values which must not be

exceeded. The actual trailer load is

the difference between the actual

gross weight of the trailer and the

actual coupling socket load with the

trailer coupled.

The permissible trailer loads are

specified in the vehicle documents. In

general, they are valid for gradients

up to 12%.

The permissible trailer load applies

up to the specified incline and at sea

level. Since engine power decreases

as altitude increases due to the air

becoming thinner, therefore reducing

climbing ability, the permissible gross

train weight also decreases by 10%

for every 1000 m of altitude. The

gross train weight does not have to be

reduced when driving on roads with

slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.

motorways).

Driving and operating 225

The permissible gross train weight

must not be exceeded. This weight is

specified on the identification plate

3 279.

Vertical coupling load

The vertical coupling load is the load

exerted by the trailer on the coupling

ball. It can be varied by changing the

weight distribution when loading the

trailer.

The maximum permissible vertical

coupling load of:

● 60 kg (Grand Sport with all

engines except B20DTH /

B20NFT / D20DTR)

● 75 kg (Sports Tourer, Country

Tourer with all engines except

B20DTH / B20NFT / D20DTR)

● 90 kg (All bodystyles with

engines B20DTH / B20NFT /

D20DTR)

is specified on the towing equipment

identification plate and in the vehicle

documents. Always aim for the

maximum load, especially in the case

of heavy trailers. The vertical coupling

load should never fall below 25 kg.

Rear axle load

When the trailer is coupled and the

towing vehicle fully loaded, the

permissible rear axle load (see

identification plate or vehicle

documents) may be exceeded by

80 kg

(engines B20NFT / B20DTH /

D20DTR: 90 kg), the gross vehicle

weight rating must not be exceeded.

If the permissible rear axle load is

exceeded, a maximum speed of

60 mph applies.

Towing equipment

Caution

The folding coupling ball bar

cannot be removed from the

vehicle. When driving without a

trailer, fold in the coupling ball bar.

9Warning

Make sure that no one is in the

pivot zone of the coupling ball bar.

Risk of body injury.

When releasing the stowed

coupling ball bar, make sure to

stand left of the grip.

Release stowed coupling ball bar

Pull the grip located left to the number

plate under the rear bumper fascia at

an angle of approx. 45° to the ground.

226 Driving and operating

A buzzing tone sounds as a warning

when the release handle is pulled out

and the ball neck is disengaged.

Take the released coupling ball bar

and raise it up until it engages.

Ensure the coupling ball bar is

correctly engaged and the released

handle is guided back to its hidden

initial position, otherwise the buzzing

tone will not stop.

Stow / hide coupling ball bar

Pull the grip located left of the number

plate under the rear bumper fascia at

an angle of approx. 45° to the ground.

A buzzing tone sounds as a warning

when the release handle is pulled out

and the ball neck is disengaged.

With the flat of the hand, swivel the

released coupling ball bar to the right

until it engages under the floor. Make

sure that the release handle is back in

its hidden initial position, otherwise

the buzzing tone will not stop.

9Warning

Towing a trailer is permitted only

when the coupling ball bar is fitted

correctly. If the coupling ball bar

does not engage correctly or if the

Driving and operating 227

release handle is impossible to

guide to its hidden initial position in

the housing or if the buzzing tone

sounds after engaging the

coupling ball bar, seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Eye for break-away stopping cable

Attach break-away stopping cable to

eye.

Trailer stability assist

If the system detects snaking

movements, engine power is reduced

and the vehicle/trailer combination is

selectively braked until the snaking

ceases. While the system is working

keep steering wheel as still as

possible.

Trailer stability assistant is a function

of the Electronic Stability Control

3 174.

228 Vehicle care

Vehicle care

General Information ................... 228

Accessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 228

Vehicle storage ........................ 229

End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 229

Vehicle checks ........................... 230

Performing work ...................... 230

Bonnet ..................................... 230

Engine oil ................................. 231

Engine coolant ......................... 232

Washer fluid ............................ 233

Brakes ..................................... 233

Brake fluid ............................... 233

Vehicle battery ......................... 234

Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 236

Wiper blade replacement ........ 236

Bulb replacement ....................... 237

Halogen headlights .................. 237

LED headlights ........................ 239

Front fog lights ......................... 239

Tail lights ................................. 241

Side turn lights ......................... 246

Number plate light ................... 247

Interior lights ............................ 247

Electrical system ........................ 247

Fuses ....................................... 247

Engine compartment fuse box . 248

Instrument panel fuse box ....... 251

Vehicle tools .............................. 252

Tools ........................................ 252

Wheels and tyres ....................... 253

Winter tyres ............................. 253

Tyre designations .................... 254

Tyre pressure .......................... 254

Tyre pressure monitoring

system .................................... 255

Tread depth ............................. 257

Changing tyre and wheel size . 258

Wheel covers ........................... 258

Tyre chains .............................. 259

Tyre repair kit .......................... 259

Wheel changing ....................... 264

Spare wheel ............................ 264

Jump starting ............................. 268

Towing ....................................... 270

Towing the vehicle ................... 270

Towing another vehicle ........... 271

Appearance care ....................... 272

Exterior care ............................ 272

Interior care ............................. 274

Floor mats ............................... 275

General Information

Accessories and vehicle

modifications

We recommend the use of genuine

parts and accessories and factory

approved parts specific for your

vehicle type. We cannot assess or

guarantee reliability of other products

- even if they have a regulatory or

otherwise granted approval.

Any modification, conversion or other

changes made to standard vehicle

specifications (including, without

limitation, software modifications,

modifications of the electronic control

units) may invalidate the warranty

offered by Vauxhall. Furthermore,

such changes may affect driver

assistance systems, fuel

consumption, CO2 emissions and

other emissions of the vehicle. They

may also invalidate the vehicle

operating permit.

Vehicle care 229

Caution

When transporting the vehicle on

a train or on a recovery vehicle, the

mud flaps might be damaged.

Vehicle storage

Storage for a long period of time

If the vehicle is to be stored for several

months:

● Wash and wax the vehicle.

● Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbody

checked.

● Clean and preserve the rubber

seals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.

● Change the engine oil.

● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the coolant antifreeze and

corrosion protection.

● Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, well

ventilated place. Engage first or

reverse gear or set selector lever

to P. Prevent the vehicle from

rolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.

● Open the bonnet, close all doors

and lock the vehicle.

● Disconnect the clamp from the

negative terminal of the vehicle

battery. Note that all systems are

not functional, e.g. anti-theft

alarm system.

Putting back into operation

When the vehicle is to be put back into

operation:

● Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehicle

battery. Initialize the power

windows 3 40.

● Check tyre pressure.

● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the engine oil level.

● Check the coolant level.

● Fit the number plate if necessary.

End-of-life vehicle recovery

Information on end-of-life vehicle

recovery centres and the recycling of

end-of-life vehicles is available on our

website, where legally required. Only

entrust this work to an authorised

recycling centre.

230 Vehicle care

Vehicle checks

Performing work

9Warning

Only perform engine compartment

checks when the ignition is off.

The cooling fan may start

operating even if the ignition is off.

9Danger

The ignition system uses

extremely high voltage. Do not

touch.

Bonnet

Opening

Pull the release lever and return it to

its original position.

Move the safety catch sideways to the

left vehicle side and open the bonnet.

The bonnet is held open

automatically.

If the bonnet is opened during an

Autostop, the engine will be restarted

automatically for safety reasons.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Closing

Lower the bonnet and let it fall into the

latch from a low height (20-25 cm).

Check that the bonnet is engaged.

Vehicle care 231

Caution

Do not press the bonnet into the

latch to avoid dents.

Active bonnet 3 71.

Engine oil

Check the engine oil level manually

on a regular basis to prevent damage

to the engine. Ensure that the correct

specification of oil is used.

Recommended fluids and lubricants

3 277.

The maximum engine oil

consumption is 0.6 l per 600 miles.

Check with the vehicle on a level

surface. The engine must be at

operating temperature and switched

off for at least 5 minutes.

Caution

It is the owner's responsibility to

maintain the proper level of an

appropriate quality oil in the

engine.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,

reinsert fully, pull out and read the

engine oil level.

Different dipsticks are used

depending on engine variant.

232 Vehicle care

When the engine oil level has

dropped to the MIN mark, top up

engine oil.

The engine oil level must not exceed

the MAX mark on the dipstick.

We recommend the use of the same

grade of engine oil that was used at

last change.

Caution

Wipe off any spilled engine oil

immediately.

Caution

Overfilled engine oil must be

drained or suctioned out. If the oil

exceeds the maximum level, do

not start the vehicle and contact a

workshop.

Capacities 3 289.

Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

Engine coolant

The factory filled coolant provides

freeze protection down to approx.

-28 °C. In cold regions with very low

temperatures, the factory filled

coolant provides frost protection

down to approx. -37 °C.

Caution

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 277.

Coolant level

Caution

Too low a coolant level can cause

engine damage.

If the cooling system is cold, the

coolant level should be above the

filling line mark. Top up if the level is

low.

Vehicle care 233

Depending on the engine, the

position of the coolant container may

be different.

9Warning

Allow the engine to cool before

opening the cap. Carefully open

the cap, relieving the pressure

slowly.

To top up, use a 1:1 mixture of

released coolant concentrate mixed

with clean tap water. If no coolant

concentrate is available, use clean

tap water. Install the cap tightly. Have

the coolant concentration checked

and have the cause of the coolant

loss remedied by a workshop.

Washer fluid

Fill with clean water mixed with a

suitable quantity of approved

windscreen washer fluid which

contains antifreeze.

Caution

Only washer fluid with a sufficient

antifreeze concentration provides

protection at low temperatures or

a sudden drop in temperature.

Washer fluid 3 277.

Brakes

In the event of minimum thickness of

the brake lining, a squealing noise

sounds during braking.

Continued driving is possible but

have the brake lining replaced as

soon as possible.

Once new brake linings are installed,

do not brake unnecessarily hard for

the first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and

corrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,

skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

234 Vehicle care

The brake fluid level must be between

the MIN and MAX marks.

If fluid level is below MIN seek the

assistance of a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluid 3 277.

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery is located in the

engine compartment.

There are connecting points for jump

starting 3 268.

The vehicle battery is maintenance-

free provided that the driving profile

allows sufficient charging of the

battery. Short-distance-driving and

frequent engine starts can discharge

the battery. Avoid the use of

unnecessary electrical consumers.

Batteries do not belong in household

waste. They must be disposed of at

an appropriate recycling collection

point.

Laying up the vehicle for more than

four weeks can lead to battery

discharge. Disconnect the clamp from

the negative terminal of the vehicle

battery.

Ensure the ignition is switched off

before connecting or disconnecting

the vehicle battery.

Battery discharge protection 3 138.

Disconnecting the battery

If the vehicle's battery is to be

disconnected (e.g. for maintenance

work), the alarm siren must be

deactivated as follows: Switch the

ignition on then off, then disconnect

the vehicle's battery within

15 seconds.

Vehicle care 235

Replacing the vehicle battery

Notice

Any deviation from the instructions

given in this section may lead to

temporary deactivation or

disturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is being

replaced, please ensure that there

are no open ventilation holes in the

vicinity of the positive terminal. If a

ventilation hole is open in this area, it

must be closed off with a dummy cap,

and the ventilation in the vicinity of the

negative terminal must be opened.

Ensure that the battery is always

replaced by the same type of battery.

We recommend that you have the

vehicle battery replaced by a

workshop.

Stop-start system 3 156.

Charging the vehicle battery

9Warning

On vehicles with stop-start

system, ensure that the charging

potential does not exceed 14.6 V

when using a battery charger.

Otherwise the vehicle battery may

be damaged.

Jump starting 3 268.

Discharge protection

Battery voltage

When the vehicle battery voltage is

running low, a warning message will

appear in the Driver Information

Centre.

1. Switch off any electrical

consumers which are not required

for a safe ride, e.g. seat heating,

heated rear window or other main

consumers.

2. Charge the vehicle battery by

driving continuously for a while or

by using a charging device.

The warning message will disappear

after the engine has been started

twice without a voltage drop.

If the vehicle battery cannot be

recharged, have the cause of the fault

remedied by a workshop.

Vehicle battery state of charge

function

The function guarantees longest

vehicle battery life via a generator

with controllable power output and

optimised power distribution.

To prevent discharge of the vehicle

battery when driving, the following

systems are reduced automatically in

two stages and finally switched off:

● auxiliary heater

● heated rear and front window

● heated steering wheel

● heated mirrors

● heated seats

● fan

In the second stage, a message

which confirms the activation of the

vehicle battery discharge protection

will be displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

236 Vehicle care

Idle boost

If charging of the vehicle battery is

required due to battery condition, the

power output of the generator must

be increased. This will be achieved by

an idle boost which may be audible.

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

Power outlet

The power outlets are deactivated in

the event of low vehicle battery

voltage.

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:

● No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.

● Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness or

injury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out of

reach of children.

● The vehicle battery contains

sulphuric acid which could cause

blindness or serious burn

injuries.

● See the Owner's Manual for

further information.

● Explosive gas may be present in

the vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Diesel fuel system bleeding

If the tank has been run dry, the diesel

fuel system must be bled. Switch on

the ignition three times for

15 seconds at a time. Then crank the

engine for a maximum of

40 seconds. Repeat this process after

no less than 5 seconds. If the engine

fails to start, seek the assistance of a

workshop.

Wiper blade replacement

Windscreen

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in the

raised position. Lift retaining clip to

disengage the wiper blade and

remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled

to the wiper arm and push until it

engages.

Lower wiper arm carefully.

Vehicle care 237

Rear window

Grand Sport

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in the

raised position, press button to

disengage the wiper blade and

remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled

to the wiper arm and push until it

engages.

Lower wiper arm carefully.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade

as shown in illustration and remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled

to the wiper arm and push until it

engages.

Lower wiper arm carefully.

Bulb replacement

Switch off the ignition and switch off

the relevant switch or close the doors.

Only hold a new bulb at the base. Do

not touch the bulb glass with bare

hands.

Use only the same bulb type for

replacement.

Replace headlight bulbs from within

the engine compartment.

Bulb check

After a bulb replacement switch on

the ignition, operate and check the

lights.

Halogen headlights

Halogen headlights with separate

bulbs for low beam and high beam.

238 Vehicle care

Low beam (1) outer bulb.

High beam (2) inner bulb.

Low beam (1)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise and

remove it.

2. Disengage bulb holder by

pressing the retainer to the front.

Withdraw the bulb holder from the

reflector housing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulb

holder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Vehicle care 239

High beam (2)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise and

remove it.

2. Disengage bulb holder by

pressing the retainer to the front.

Withdraw the bulb holder from the

reflector housing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulb

holder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Front turn lights

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Side lights

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Daytime running lights

In case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

LED headlights

Headlights for low and high beam,

sidelights, daytime running lights and

turn lights are designed as LEDs and

cannot be changed.

Have lights repaired by a workshop in

case of failure.

Front fog lights

1. Grand Sport, Sports Tourer

240 Vehicle care

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat

screwdriver to prevent paint

damage. Insert the screwdriver in

the recess at the edge of the

cover. Release the cover by

levering it out carefully.

Country Tourer

Undo the screw with a torx

screwdriver.

2. Grand Sport, Sports Tourer

Undo screw with the torx

screwdriver and remove the

faceplate.

Country Tourer

Wrap a cloth around the tip of the

flat screwdriver to prevent paint

damage. Lever out the faceplate

by inserting the screwdriver in the

recess and remove it.

3. Undo three screws with the torx

screwdriver and remove the light

assembly to the front.

Vehicle care 241

4. Turn the bulb socket

anticlockwise and remove it from

the light assembly.

5. Disengage the plug connector by

pressing the retaining lug.

6. Remove and replace the bulb unit

and attach the plug connector.

Note that the bulb and the socket

are one unit and have to be

changed together.

7. Insert the bulb socket into the light

assembly by turning clockwise

and engage.

8. Mount the light assembly by

tightening the three screws.

9. Attach the faceplate and tighten

the screw.

10. Grand Sport, Sports Tourer

Attach and engage the cover.

Tail lights

Tail lights and brake lights are

designed as LEDs. In case of failure,

have LEDs replaced by a workshop.

Turn lights, rear fog light and reverse

lights are designed for bulbs and can

be changed as follows.

Grand Sport

Light assembly in the body

1. Remove the cover on the

respective side.

242 Vehicle care

2. Unscrew the two plastic securing

nuts from the inside by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw light assembly

from recess and remove. Take

care that the cable is not being

pulled off.

4. Turn the turn light bulb socket

anticlockwise and remove it from

the light assembly.

5. Remove and replace the turn light

bulb.

6. Attach the bulb socket to the light

assembly.

7. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten the

securing nuts from the inside of

the load compartment. Attach

cover.

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgate

and remove it.

Vehicle care 243

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nut

by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw light assembly

from recess and remove. Take

care that the cable is not being

pulled off.

4. Turn the bulb socket

anticlockwise and remove it from

the light assembly.

Rear fog light (1)

Reverse light (2)

5. Detach the bulb from the bulb

socket and replace the bulb.

Rear fog light

244 Vehicle care

Reverse light

6. Insert the bulb socket into the tail

light assembly. Fit light assembly

on the tailgate and tighten the

screw from the inside. Attach

cover.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Light assembly in the body

1. Open the covers with screwdriver.

Unscrew and remove both

screws.

2. Carefully withdraw light assembly

from recess and remove. Take

care that the cable is not being

pulled off.

3. Turn the turn light bulb socket

anticlockwise and remove it from

the light assembly.

4. Detach the bulb from the bulb

socket and replace the turn light

bulb.

5. Attach the bulb socket to the light

assembly.

6. Attach the light assembly to the

vehicle body and tighten the

screws. Close covers.

Vehicle care 245

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgate

and remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nut

by hand.

3. Carefully withdraw the light

assembly from the recess and

remove. Take care that the cable

is not being pulled off.

4. Turn the bulb socket

anticlockwise and remove it from

the light assembly.

Rear fog light (1)

Reverse light (2)

5. Detach the bulb from the bulb

socket and replace the bulb.

Rear fog light

246 Vehicle care

Reverse light

6. Insert the bulb socket into the light

assembly. Fit light assembly on

the tailgate and tighten the screw

from the inside. Attach cover.

Side turn lights

To replace bulb, remove lamp

housing:

1. Slide the lamp housing forward

and remove it at the back.

2. Turn bulb holder anticlockwise

and remove from housing.

3. Pull bulb from bulb holder and

replace it.

Vehicle care 247

4. Insert bulb holder and turn

clockwise.

5. Insert left end of the lamp, slide to

the left and insert right end.

Number plate light

The number plate light is designed as

LEDs and can not be changed. In

case of defective LEDs, have them

replaced by a workshop.

Interior lights

Have the following bulbs replaced by

a workshop:

● courtesy light, reading lights

● load compartment light

● instrument panel illumination

Electrical system

Fuses

Data on the replacement fuse must

match the data on the defective fuse.

There are two fuse boxes in the

vehicle:

● engine compartment

● instrument panel

Before replacing a fuse, turn off the

respective switch and the ignition.

A blown fuse can be recognised by its

melted wire.

Caution

Do not replace the fuse until the

cause of the fault has been

remedied.

Some functions are protected by

several fuses.

Fuses may also be inserted without

existence of a function.

Fuse extractor

A fuse extractor may be located in the

fuse box in the engine compartment.

The extractor has two sides, each

side is designed for a different type of

fuses.

248 Vehicle care

Grab the fuse with the fuse extractor

and withdraw the fuse.

Engine compartment fuse

box

The fuse box is in the front left of the

engine compartment.

Disengage the cover and remove it.

Vehicle care 249

No. Circuit

1–

2–

3ABS

4–

5–

6Tailgate

7Rear fog light / Front fog lights

8Memory module

9Heated windscreen

10 Seat lumbar

11 DC / DC battery

12 Heated rear window

13 Heated mirror

14 –

15 –

16 Front wiper

17 Power seat, passenger

No. Circuit

18 Sunblind

19 Power seat, driver

20 –

21 Sunroof

22 Rear wiper / Airbag

23 Adaptive forward lighting

24 –

25 –

26 Transmission control module

27 Ignition / Instrument panel

28 –

29 Rear view camera / Air vent

30 Malfunction indicator light /

Trailer

31 –

32 Camera

33 Seat heat front

34 Seat heat rear

No. Circuit

35 Damping / All-wheel drive

36 Fuel system

37 –

38 –

39 –

40 Steering wheel lock

41 –

42 –

43 Heated steering wheel

44 Headlight range adjustment

45 –

46 Engine control module

47 –

48 DC/DC converter / Air vent / E-

Boost

49 Rear door control module

50 –

51 –

250 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

52 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 Starter

57 –

58 –

59 Left headlight (LED)

60 Cooling fan

61 –

62 –

63 –

64 –

65 Climate control

66 –

67 –

68 –

No. Circuit

69 Right high beam (Halogen) /

Right headlight (LED)

70 Left high beam (Halogen)

71 –

72 Starter

73 –

74 Transmission control module

75 Engine control module

76 Exhaust reduction system

77 –

78 Horn

79 Washer system

80 –

81 Engine control module

82 –

83 Ignition coil

84 Ignition coil

85 Powertrain

No. Circuit

86 –

87 Diesel fuel heating

88 Air shutter

89 –

90 –

91 –

92 After boil pump

93 Electronic key system

94 –

95 Coolant pump

96 Diesel fuel heating

97 –

98 –

99 Coolant pump

After having changed defective fuses,

close the fuse box cover and press

until it engages.

If the fuse box cover is not closed

correctly, malfunction may occur.

Vehicle care 251

Instrument panel fuse box

In left-hand drive vehicles, the fuse

box is behind a cover in the

instrument panel.

Disengage cover at the side and

remove.

In right-hand drive vehicles, the fuse

box is located behind a cover in the

glovebox. Open the glovebox and

remove the cover.

No. Circuit

1Left power window

2Right power window

3Body control module

4Climate control fan

5Body control module

6Trailer provisions

7Rear seat power folding

8Body control module

9Engine control module

10 Head-up display

11 NOx reduction / Pipe heater

12 NOx reduction / Soot sensor

13 AdBlue module

14 Heated steering wheel

15 Transmission control module

16 Amplifier

17 Alarm

252 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

18 Body control module

19 AdBlue module

20 Body control module

21 Body control module

22 Body control module

23 Electric steering wheel lock

24 Airbag

25 Diagnostic connector

26 Power outlet load compartment

27 EBCM valve

28 Police provision

29 –

30 –

31 Steering wheel controls

32 Ignition switch

33 Climate control

34 Central gateway module

No. Circuit

35 AUX / USB connector

36 Wireless charger

37 Rear wiper

38 Emergency call

39 Display

40 Parking assist

41 Overhead console

42 Infotainment System

Vehicle tools

Tools

Vehicles with spare wheel

The jack with wheel wrench, the tools,

an extension bolt for securing a

damaged wheel and the towing eye

are placed in the tool box below the

spare wheel in the load compartment.

Spare wheel 3 264.

Vehicle care 253

Vehicles without spare wheel

The screwdriver and the towing eye

are located in a box below the floor

cover in the load compartment.

Tyre repair kit 3 259.

Vehicles with sound system

The screwdriver and the towing eye

are located below the floor cover in

the load compartment, beside the

sound system.

Tyre repair kit 3 259.

Wheels and tyres

Tyre condition, wheel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at right

angles if possible. Driving over sharp

edges can cause tyre and wheel

damage. Do not trap tyres on the kerb

when parking.

Regularly check the wheels for

damage. Seek the assistance of a

workshop in the event of damage or

unusual wear.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres improve driving safety at

temperatures below 7 °C and should

therefore be fitted on all wheels.

In accordance with country-specific

regulations, affix the speed sticker in

the driver's field of view.

All tyre sizes are permitted as winter

tyres 3 291.

254 Vehicle care

GSi with Michelin Pilot Super Sport or

Pilot Sport 4 S tyres

This model is factory-fitted with high

performance sports tyres, which have

a reduced performance at low

temperature.

9Danger

Use winter tyres at temperatures

below 0 °C, otherwise damage of

the high performance sports tyres

is possible.

Tyre designations

E.g. 215/60 R 16 95 V

215 : tyre width, mm

60 : cross-section ratio (tyre height

to tyre width), %

R: belt type: Radial

RF : type: RunFlat

16 : wheel diameter, inches

95 : load index e.g. 95 is equivalent

to 690 kg

V: speed code letter

Speed code letter:

Q: up to 100 mph

S: up to 112 mph

T: up to 118 mph

H: up to 130 mph

V: up to 150 mph

W: up to 168 mph

Choose a tyre appropriate for the

maximum speed of this vehicle. Refer

to the EEC Certificate of Conformity

provided with the vehicle or other

national registration documents.

Optional equipment could reduce the

maximum speed of the vehicle.

Directional tyres

Directional tyres should be mounted

so that they rotate in the correct

direction. The proper rotation

direction is indicated by a symbol

(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyre pressure

Check the pressure of cold tyres at

least every 14 days and before any

long journey. Do not forget the spare

wheel.

This also applies to vehicles with tyre

pressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 291.

The tyre pressure information label

on the left door frame indicates the

original equipment tyres and the

correspondent tyre pressures.

The tyre pressure data refers to cold

tyres. It applies to summer and winter

tyres.

Always inflate the spare tyre to the

pressure specified for full load.

The ECO tyre pressure serves to

achieve the smallest amount of fuel

consumption possible.

Make sure tyre loading setting

matches the current tyre pressure.

Tyre loading 3 255.

Vehicle care 255

Incorrect tyre pressures will impair

safety, vehicle handling, comfort and

fuel economy and will increase tyre

wear.

Tyre pressures differ depending on

various options. For the correct tyre

pressure value, follow the procedure

below:

1. Identify drive axle and body style.

2. Identify the engine identifier code.

Engine data 3 284.

3. Identify the respective tyre.

The tyre pressure tables show all

possible tyre combinations 3 291.

For the tyres approved for your

vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The driver is responsible for correct

adjustment of tyre pressure.

9Warning

If the pressure is too low, this can

result in considerable tyre warm-

up and internal damage, leading to

tread separation and even to tyre

blow-out at high speeds.

9Warning

For specific tyres the

recommended tyre pressure as

shown in the tyre pressure table

may exceed the maximum tyre

pressure as indicated on the tyre.

Never exceed the maximum tyre

pressure as indicated on the tyre.

After adjusting tyre pressure, select

the according tyre loading setting on

the page Tyre load in the Driver

Information Centre 3 110.

Temperature dependency

The tyre pressure depends on the

temperature of the tyre. During

driving, tyre temperature and

pressure increase. Tyre pressure

values provided on the tyre

information label and tyre pressure

chart are valid for cold tyres, which

means at 20 °C.

The pressure increases by nearly

1.5 psi for a 10 °C temperature

increase. This must be considered

when warm tyres are checked.

The tyre pressure value displayed in

the Driver Information Centre shows

the real tyre pressure. A cooled down

tyre will show a decreased value,

which does not indicate an air leak.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system

The tyre pressure monitoring system

checks the pressure of all four wheels

once a minute when vehicle speed

exceeds a certain limit.

Caution

Tyre pressure monitoring system

warns just about low tyre pressure

condition and does not replace

regular tyre maintenance by the

driver.

256 Vehicle care

All wheels must be equipped with

pressure sensors and the tyres must

have the prescribed pressure.

Notice

In countries where the tyre pressure

monitoring system is legally

required, the use of wheels without

pressure sensors will invalidate the

vehicle operating permit.

Select the Tyre pressure monitoring

page under the Info Menu in the

Driver Information Centre 3 110.

System status and pressure warnings

are displayed by a message

indicating the corresponding tyre in

the Driver Information Centre.

The system considers the tyre

temperature and the tyre loading

setting for the warnings.

Tyre loading setting, see below in this

chapter.

Temperature dependency 3 254.

Baselevel display: If the pressure of a

tyre decreases significantly, the

respective tyre pressure value is

displayed inverted.

Uplevel display: Tyre pressure values

in normal range are shown in green

letters. If the pressure of a tyre

decreases significantly, the

respective value will turn its colour to

amber.

A detected low tyre pressure

condition is indicated by the control

indicator w 3 108.

If w illuminates, stop as soon as

possible and inflate the tyres as

recommended 3 291.

Ensure that vehicle loading status

matches selected tyre pressure.

Vehicle loading status, see below in

this chapter.

After inflating, some driving may be

required to update the tyre pressure

values in the Driver Information

Centre. During this time w may

continue to illuminate.

If w illuminates at lower temperatures

and extinguishes after some driving,

this could be an indicator for

approaching a low tyre pressure

condition. Check tyre pressure.

Vehicle messages 3 121.

Only mount wheels with pressure

sensors, otherwise the tyre pressure

will not be displayed and w

illuminates continuously.

A spare wheel or temporary spare

wheel is not equipped with pressure

sensors. The tyre pressure

monitoring system is not operational

for these wheels. Control indicator w

Vehicle care 257

illuminates. For the further three

wheels the system remains

operational.

The use of commercially available

liquid tyre repair kits can impair the

function of the system. Factory-

approved repair kits can be used.

Operating electronic devices or being

close to facilities using similar wave

frequencies could disrupt the tyre

pressure monitoring system.

Each time the tyres are replaced, tyre

pressure monitoring system sensors

must be dismounted and serviced.

For the screwed sensor, replace

valve core and sealing ring. For the

clipped sensor, replace complete

valve stem.

Vehicle loading status

Adjust tyre pressure to load condition

according tyre information label or

tyre pressure chart 3 291, and select

the appropriate setting in Tyre Load

within the vehicle information menu

3 110. This setting determines the

reference pressures for the tyre

pressure warnings.

The Tyre Load menu only appears

when the vehicle is at a standstill and

the parking brake is applied. On

vehicles with automatic transmission

the selector lever must be in P.

Select:

●Light for comfort pressure up to

3 people.

●Eco for Eco pressure up to

3 people.

●Max for full loading.

Auto learn function

After changing wheels or wheel

positions the vehicle must be

stationary for approx. 20 minutes,

before the system recalculates. The

following relearn process takes up to

10 minutes of driving in a speed range

of 25 to 60 mph. Avoid to drive outside

of this range for a longer time. If

possible, use a country road or similar

which allows continuous driving.

During relearn process $ can be

displayed or pressure values can

swap in the Driver Information Centre.

If problems occur during the relearn

process, a failure message is

displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. w will flash for 60 seconds

and then illuminate continuously.

If this happens, repeat learning

process. Keep your vehicle stationary

for approx. 20 minutes and then drive

again for 10 minutes as described

above.

Tread depth

Check tread depth at regular

intervals.

Tyres should be replaced for safety

reasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm

(4 mm for winter tyres).

258 Vehicle care

For safety reasons, it is

recommended that the tread depth of

the tyres on one axle should not vary

by more than 2 mm.

The legally permissible minimum

tread depth (1.6 mm) has been

reached when the tread has worn

down as far as one of the tread wear

indicators (TWI). Their position is

indicated by markings on the

sidewall.

If there is more wear at the front than

the rear, swap round front wheels and

rear wheels periodically. Ensure that

the direction of rotation of the wheels

remains the same.

Tyres age, even if they are not used.

We recommend tyre replacement

every 6 years.

Changing tyre and wheel

size

If tyres of a different size than those

fitted at the factory are used, it may be

necessary to reprogramme the

nominal tyre pressure and make

other vehicle modifications.

After converting to a different tyre

size, have the label with tyre

pressures replaced and the tyre

pressure monitoring system

reinitialised 3 255.

9Warning

The use of unsuitable tyres or

wheels may lead to accidents and

will invalidate the vehicle

operating permit.

Wheel covers

Wheel covers and tyres that are

factory approved for the respective

vehicle and comply with all of the

relevant wheel and tyre combination

requirements must be used.

If the wheel covers and tyres used are

not factory approved, the tyres must

not have a rim protection ridge.

Wheel covers must not impair brake

cooling.

9Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel

covers could lead to sudden

pressure loss and thereby

accidents.

Vehicles with steel wheels: When

using locking wheel nuts, do not

attach wheel covers.

Vehicle care 259

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on the

front wheels.

Always use fine mesh chains that add

no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread

and the inboard sides (including chain

lock).

9Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are only permitted on

tyres of size 215/60 R16, 215/55 R17,

225/55 R17 and 235/45 R18.

Temporary spare wheel

The use of tyre chains is not permitted

on the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kit

Minor damage to the tyre tread can be

repaired with the tyre repair kit.

Do not remove foreign bodies from

the tyres.

Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that

is at tyre's side wall cannot be

repaired with the tyre repair kit.

9Warning

Do not drive faster than 50 mph.

Do not use for a lengthy period.

Steering and handling may be

affected.

Two types of tyre repair kit are

available:

●Type 1 indicated by the on/off

switch at the top of the

compressor.

260 Vehicle care

●Type 2 indicated by the on/off

switch at the side of the

compressor.

If vehicle has a flat tyre:

Apply the parking brake and engage

first gear, reverse gear or P.

On vehicles with audio speaker

system, the tyre repair kit is stowed

together with the tools.

On other versions, the tyre repair kit

is stored in a bag.

Loosen the screw and remove the

bag.

Take the sealant bottle and the

compressor out of the box.

1. Remove the electrical connection

cable and air hose from the

stowage compartments on the

underside of the compressor.

Vehicle care 261

2. Type 1: screw the compressor air

hose to the connection on the

sealant bottle and fit the sealant

bottle into the retainer on the

compressor.

Type 2: remove screw plug from

the compressor and from the

sealant bottle. Screw the bottle on

the compressor without removing

the tinfoil from the bottle.

3. Set the compressor near the tyre

in such a way that the sealant

bottle is upright.

4. Unscrew valve cap from defective

tyre.

5. Type 1: screw the filler hose to the

tyre valve.

Type 2: remove protection cap

from filler hose and screw the filler

hose to the tyre valve. The air

release valve must be closed (turn

clockwise).

6. The switch on the compressor

must be set to J.

7. Connect the compressor plug to

the power outlet or cigarette

lighter socket.

To avoid discharging the battery,

we recommend running the

engine.

262 Vehicle care

8. Set the rocker switch on the

compressor to I. The tyre is filled

with sealant.

9. The compressor pressure gauge

briefly indicates up to 6 bar whilst

the sealant bottle is emptying

(approx. 30 seconds). Then the

pressure starts to drop.

10. All of the sealant is pumped into

the tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.

11. The prescribed tyre pressure

should be obtained within

10 minutes. Tyre pressure

3 291. When the correct pressure

is obtained, switch off the

compressor.

Do not run the compressor longer

than 10 minutes.

Type 1: if the tyre pressure is not

obtained within 10 minutes,

remove the tyre repair kit. Move

the vehicle one tyre rotation.

Reattach the tyre repair kit and

continue the filling procedure for

10 minutes. Check tyre pressure

once more. If the prescribed tyre

pressure is still not obtained, the

tyre is too badly damaged. Seek

the assistance of a workshop.

Drain excess tyre pressure with

the button over the pressure

indicator.

Depending on version the button

can be located on the air hose.

Type 2: remove tyre repair kit and

drive immediately up to 6 miles,

but not longer than 10 minutes.

Check tyre pressure once more. If

the tyre pressure is not obtained,

reattach the tyre repair kit and

continue the filling procedure for

10 minutes. If the prescribed tyre

pressure is still not obtained, the

tyre is too badly damaged. Seek

the assistance of a workshop.

If the pressure is obtained, correct

to the prescribed tyre pressure by

using the compressor to increase

or decrease by opening the air

Vehicle care 263

release valve (turn anticlockwise)

at the air filler hose.

12. Detach the tyre repair kit.

Type 1: push catch on bracket to

remove sealant bottle from

bracket. Screw tyre inflation hose

to the free connection of sealant

bottle. This prevents sealant from

escaping.

Type 2: Sealant bottle can not be

removed from the compressor.

Have the sealant bottle replaced

by your workshop.

13. Stow tyre repair kit in the load

compartment.

14. Remove any excess sealant

using a cloth.

15. Take the label indicating

maximum permitted speed from

the sealant bottle and affix in the

driver's field of view.

16. Continue driving immediately so

that sealant is evenly distributed

in the tyre. After driving approx.

6 miles (but no more than

10 minutes), stop and check tyre

pressure. Screw compressor air

hose directly onto tyre valve.

If tyre pressure is more than

1.3 bar, set it to the correct value.

Repeat the procedure until there

is no more loss of pressure.

If the tyre pressure has fallen

below 1.3 bar, the vehicle must

not be used. Seek the assistance

of a workshop.

17. Stow away tyre repair kit in the

box.

18. Fix the box with the screw.

Notice

The driving characteristics of the

repaired tyre are severely affected,

therefore have this tyre replaced.

If unusual noise is heard or the

compressor becomes hot, turn

compressor off for at least 30 min.

The built-in safety valve opens at a

pressure of 7 bar (102 psi).

Note the expiry date of the kit. After

this date its sealing capability is no

longer guaranteed. Pay attention to

storage information on sealant

bottle.

Replace the used sealant bottle.

Dispose of the bottle as prescribed

by applicable laws.

The compressor and sealant can be

used from approx. -30 °C.

The adapters possibly supplied can

be used to pump up other items e.g.

footballs, air mattresses, inflatable

dinghies etc. They can be located on

the underside of the compressor. To

remove, screw on compressor air

hose and withdraw adapter.

264 Vehicle care

Wheel changing

Make the following preparations and

observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The front

wheels must be in the straight-

ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and

engage first gear, reverse gear or

● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board

(max. 1 cm thick) should be

placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the

vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in

the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up

vehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it is

raised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread with

a clean cloth before mounting the

wheel.

9Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheel

nut and wheel nut cone.

Jacking positions

The jacking positions shown refer to

the use of lifting arms and accessory

jacks used for changing winter /

summer tyres.

Rear arm position of the lifting

platform centrically under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

Front arm position of the lifting

platform centrically under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

Spare wheel

The spare wheel can be classified as

a temporary spare wheel depending

on the size compared to the other

mounted wheels and country

regulations. In this case a permissible

maximum speed applies, even

though no label at the spare wheel

indicates this.

Vehicle care 265

Only mount one temporary spare

wheel. Do not drive faster than

50 mph. Take curves slowly. Do not

use for a long period of time.

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that is

smaller than the other wheels or in

combination with winter tyres

could affect driveability. Have the

defective tyre replaced as soon as

possible.

Caution

If driving with a temporary spare

wheel, active emergency braking

has to deactivated.

The spare wheel is located in the load

compartment beneath the floor

covering.

To remove:

1. Open the floor cover.

2. The spare wheel is secured with a

wing nut. Unscrew the wing nut

and take out the spare wheel.

Under the spare wheel there is the

box with vehicle tools.

3. When, after a wheel change, no

wheel is placed in the spare wheel

well, secure the tool box by

tightening the wing nut as far as it

will go and close floor cover.

4. After wheel change back to full

size wheel, place the spare wheel

outside up in the well and secure

with the wing nut.

Only mount one temporary spare

wheel. The permissible maximum

speed on the label on the temporary

spare wheel is only valid for the

factory-fitted tyre size.

Fitting the spare wheel

Make the following preparations and

observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The front

wheels must be in the straight-

ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and

engage first gear, reverse gear or

● Remove the spare wheel.

● Never change more than one

wheel at once.

266 Vehicle care

● Use the jack only to change

wheels in case of puncture, not

for seasonal winter or summer

tyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.

● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board

(max. 1 cm thick) should be

placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the

vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in

the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up

vehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it is

raised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread with

a clean cloth before mounting the

wheel.

9Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheel

nut and wheel nut cone.

1. Steel wheels with cover: Pull off

the wheel cover.

Alloy wheels: Disengage wheel

nut caps with a flat screwdriver

and remove. To protect the wheel

paint and the cap, wrap a cloth

around the screwdriver tip.

2. Fold out the wheel wrench and

install ensuring that it locates

securely and loosen each wheel

nut by half a turn.

The wheels might be protected by

locking wheel nuts. To loosen

these specific nuts, first attach the

adapter for the locking wheel nuts

onto the head of the nut before

installing the wheel wrench. The

adapter is located in the glovebox.

3. Ensure the jack is correctly

positioned under the relevant

vehicle jacking point.

Some versions have sill panels

with covered vehicle jacking

Vehicle care 267

points: pull out the cover at the

respective jacking point firstly.

4. Set the jack to the necessary

height. Position it directly below

the jacking point in a manner that

prevents it from slipping.

Attach wheel wrench and with the

jack correctly aligned rotate wheel

wrench until wheel is clear of the

ground.

5. Unscrew the wheel nuts.

6. Change the wheel.

7. Screw on the wheel nuts.

8. Lower the vehicle and remove

jack.

9. Install the wheel wrench ensuring

that it is located securely and

tighten each nut in a crosswise

sequence. Tightening torque is

140 Nmfor all models except GSi.

GSi models have a tightening

torque of 190 Nm

10. Align the valve hole in the wheel

cover with the tyre valve before

installing.

Install wheel nut caps.

11. Install vehicle jacking point cover,

if removed before.

12. Stow and secure the replaced

wheel, the vehicle tools 3 252 and

the adapter for the locking wheel

nuts 3 73.

13. Check the tyre pressure of the

installed tyre and the wheel nut

torque as soon as possible.

Stowing the replaced full size

wheel in the spare wheel well

Secure a damaged full size wheel

facing upwards with the wing nut in

the spare wheel well after mounting

an extension bolt on the thread bolt.

The extension bolt is stowed with the

vehicle tools 3 252. To secure the

wheel:

268 Vehicle care

1. Stick the extension bolt onto the

thread bolt.

2. Store the damaged wheel outside

up in the spare wheel well and

secure it by turning the wing nut

clockwise on the extension bolt.

9Warning

Storing a jack, a wheel or other

equipment in the load

compartment could cause injury if

they are not secured properly.

During a sudden stop or a

collision, loose equipment could

cause personal injury or damage

to the load or vehicle.

Always store jack and tools in the

respective storage compartments

and secure them by fixing.

Damaged wheel placed in the load

compartment must always be

secured properly.

Spare wheel with directional tyre

The following applies to tyres fitted

opposing the rolling direction:

● Driveability may be affected.

Have the defective tyre renewed

or repaired as soon as possible

and fit it instead of the spare

wheel.

● Drive particularly carefully on wet

and snow-covered road

surfaces.

Jump starting

A vehicle with a discharged vehicle

battery can be started using jump

leads and the vehicle battery of

another vehicle.

Do not start with quick charger.

9Warning

Be extremely careful when starting

with jump leads. Any deviation

from the following instructions can

lead to injuries or damage caused

by battery explosion or damage to

the electrical systems of both

vehicles.

9Warning

Avoid contact of the battery with

eyes, skin, fabrics and painted

surfaces. The fluid contains

sulphuric acid which can cause

injuries and damage in the event

of direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle battery

to naked flames or sparks.

Vehicle care 269

● A discharged vehicle battery can

already freeze at a temperature

of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen vehicle

battery before connecting jump

leads.

● Wear eye protection and

protective clothing when

handling a vehicle battery.

● Use a booster vehicle battery

with the same voltage (12 V). Its

capacity (Ah) must not be much

less than that of the discharged

vehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulated

terminals and a cross section of

at least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 for

diesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the discharged

vehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessary

electrical consumers.

● Do not lean over the vehicle

battery during jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of one

lead to touch those of the other

lead.

● The vehicles must not come into

contact with each other during

the jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake,

transmission in neutral,

automatic transmission in P.

Open the positive terminal protection

caps of both vehicle batteries.

Lead connection order:

1. Connect the red lead to the

positive terminal of the booster

vehicle battery.

2. Connect the other end of the red

lead to the positive terminal of the

discharged vehicle battery.

3. Connect the black lead to the

negative terminal of the booster

vehicle battery.

4. Connect the other end of the black

lead to a vehicle grounding point

of your vehicle in the engine

compartment.

Route the leads so that they cannot

catch on rotating parts in the engine

compartment.

To start the engine:

1. Start the engine of the vehicle

providing the jump.

2. After five minutes, start the other

engine. Start attempts should be

made for no longer than

15 seconds at an interval of

1 minute.

3. Allow both engines to idle for

approx. 3 minutes with the leads

connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers

(e.g. headlights, heated rear

window) of the vehicle receiving

the jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactly

when removing leads.

270 Vehicle care

Towing

Towing the vehicle

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat

screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the

edge of the cap. Release the cap by

levering it out carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the

vehicle tools 3 252.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will

go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

Attach a tow rope – or better still a tow

rod – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for

towing and not for recovering the

vehicle.

Switch on ignition to release steering

wheel lock and to permit operation of

brake lights, horn and windscreen

wiper.

Caution

Deactivate the driver assistance

systems like active emergency

braking 3 193, otherwise the

vehicle may automatically brake

during towing.

Switch the selector lever to neutral.

Release the parking brake.

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.

Excessive tractive force can

damage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running,

considerably more force is needed to

brake and steer.

To prevent the entry of exhaust gases

from the towing vehicle, switch on the

air recirculation and close the

windows.

Vehicles with manual transmission

and All-wheel drive: If the vehicle is

towed with all four wheels on the

ground then there are no technical

Vehicle care 271

limitations for speed and distance. If

only one axle has been raised, the

maximum speed is 30 mph. There is

no distance limitation.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

and All-wheel drive: The vehicle must

be towed facing forwards. If the

vehicle is towed with all four wheels

on the ground, the maximum speed is

30 mph and for a maximum of

30 miles. If the front axle has been

raised, the maximum speed is

30 mph. There is no distance

limitation.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Iinsert cap with the outer flange into

the recess and fix cap by pushing.

Towing another vehicle

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat

screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the

edge of the cap. Release the cap by

levering it out carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the

vehicle tools 3 252.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will

go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

The lashing eye at the rear

underneath the vehicle must never be

used as a towing eye.

Attach a tow rope – or better still a tow

rod – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for

towing and not for recovering a

vehicle.

272 Vehicle care

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.

Excessive tractive force can

damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Insert cap with the upper flange into

the recess and fix cap by pushing.

Appearance care

Exterior care

Locks

The locks are lubricated at the factory

using a high quality lock cylinder

grease. Use a de-icing agent only

when absolutely necessary, as this

has a degreasing effect and impairs

lock function. After using a de-icing

agent, have the locks regreased by a

workshop.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is

exposed to environmental influences.

Wash and wax your vehicle regularly.

When using automatic vehicle

washes, select a programme that

includes waxing.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,

pollen and the like should be cleaned

off immediately, as they contain

aggressive constituents which can

cause paint damage.

If using a vehicle wash, comply with

the vehicle wash manufacturer's

instructions. The windscreen wiper

and rear window wiper must be

switched off. Remove antenna and

external accessories such as roof

racks etc.

If you wash your vehicle by hand,

make sure that the insides of the

wheel housings are also thoroughly

rinsed out.

Clean edges and folds on opened

doors and the bonnet as well as the

areas they cover.

Clean bright metal mouldings with a

cleaning solution approved for

aluminium to avoid damages.

Caution

Always use a cleaning agent with

a pH value of four to nine.

Do not use cleaning agents on hot

surfaces.

Do not clean the engine compartment

with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet

cleaner.

Vehicle care 273

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off the

vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use

separate leathers for painted and

glass surfaces: remnants of wax on

the windows will impair vision.

Have the door hinges of all doors

greased by a workshop.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other light covers are

made of plastic. Do not use any

abrasive or caustic agents, do not use

an ice scraper, and do not clean them

dry.

Polishing and waxing

Wax the vehicle regularly (at the

latest when water no longer beads).

Otherwise, the paintwork will dry out.

Polishing is necessary only if the paint

has become dull or if solid deposits

have become attached to it.

Paintwork polish with silicone forms a

protective film, making waxing

unnecessary.

Plastic body parts must not be treated

with wax or polishing agents.

Windows and windscreen wiper

blades

Switch off wipers before handling in

their areas.

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois

leather together with window cleaner

and insect remover.

When cleaning the rear window from

inside, always wipe in parallel to the

heating element to prevent damage.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a

sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the

scraper firmly against the glass so

that no dirt can get under it and

scratch the glass.

Clean smearing wiper blades with a

soft cloth and window cleaner.

Remove dirt residues from smearing

wiper blades by using a soft cloth and

window cleaner. Also make sure to

remove any residues such as wax,

insect residues and similar from the

window.

Ice residues, pollution and continuous

wiping on dry windows will damage or

even destroy the wiper blades.

Sunroof

Never clean with solvents or abrasive

agents, fuels, aggressive media

(e.g. paint cleaner, acetone-

containing solutions etc.), acidic or

highly alkaline media or abrasive

pads. Do not apply wax or polishing

agents to the sunroof.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet

cleaners.

Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheel

cleaner.

Rims are painted and can be treated

with the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damage

Rectify minor paintwork damage with

a touch-up pen before rust forms.

Have more extensive damage or rust

areas repaired by a workshop.

Underbody

Some areas of the vehicle underbody

have a PVC undercoating while other

critical areas have a durable

protective wax coating.

274 Vehicle care

After the underbody is washed, check

the underbody and have it waxed if

necessary.

Bitumen / rubber materials could

damage the PVC coating. Have

underbody work carried out by a

workshop.

Before and after winter, wash the

underbody and have the protective

wax coating checked.

Liquid gas system

9Danger

Liquid gas is heavier than air and

can collect in sink points.

Take care when performing work

at the underbody in a pit.

For painting work and when using a

drying booth at a temperature above

60 °C, the liquid gas tank must be

removed.

Do not make any modifications to the

liquid gas system.

Towing equipment

Do not clean the coupling ball bar with

a steam-jet or high-pressure jet

cleaner.

Air shutter

Clean the shutter system in the front

bumper to maintain correct

functionality.

Interior care

Interior and upholstery

Only clean the vehicle interior,

including the instrument panel fascia

and panelling, with a dry cloth or

interior cleaner.

Clean the leather upholstery with

clear water and a soft cloth. In case of

heavy soiling, use leather care.

The instrument cluster and the

displays should only be cleaned using

a soft damp cloth. If necessary use a

weak soap solution.

Clean fabric upholstery with a

vacuum cleaner and brush. Remove

stains with an upholstery cleaner.

Clothing fabrics may not be

colourfast. This could cause visible

discolourations, especially on light-

coloured upholstery. Removable

stains and discolourations should be

cleaned as soon as possible.

Clean seat belts with lukewarm water

or interior cleaner.

Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as open

Velcro fasteners on clothing could

damage seat upholstery.

The same applies to clothing with

sharp-edged objects, like zips or

belts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber parts

Plastic and rubber parts can be

cleaned with the same cleaner as

used to clean the body. Use interior

cleaner if necessary. Do not use any

other agent. Avoid solvents and petrol

in particular. Do not use high-

pressure jet cleaners.

Vehicle care 275

Floor mats

9Warning

If a floor mat has the wrong size or

is not properly installed, it can

interfere with the accelerator pedal

and/or brake pedal, what can

cause unintended acceleration

and/or increased stopping

distance which can cause a crash

and injury.

Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.

● The original equipment floor mats

were designed for your vehicle. If

the floor mats need replacing, it

is recommended that certified

floor mats be purchased. Always

check that the floor mats do not

interfere with the pedals.

● Use the floor mat with the correct

side up. Do not turn it over.

● Do not place anything on top of

the driver side floor mat.

● Use only a single floor mat on the

driver side.

● Do not place one floor mat on top

of another.

Inserting and removing the floor

mats

The driver side floor mat is held in

place by two retainers.

To install the driver's side floor mat:

1. Move the driver's seat backwards

as far as possible.

2. Align slots in the mat with the

retainers, as shown.

3. Turn retainers clockwise for a

quarter turn.

Removing

1. Move the driver's seat backwards

as far as possible.

2. Turn retainers a quarter turn

towards the opposite direction

than during installation.

3. Remove the mat.

276 Service and maintenance

Service and

maintenance

General information ................... 276

Service information .................. 276

Recommended fluids, lubricants

and parts .................................... 277

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ................................ 277

General information

Service information

In order to ensure economical and

safe vehicle operation and to

maintain the value of your vehicle, it

is of vital importance that all

maintenance work is carried out at the

proper intervals as specified.

The detailed, up-to-date service

schedule for your vehicle is available

at the workshop.

Service display 3 103.

European service intervals

Maintenance of your vehicle is

required every 20,000 miles or after

one year, whichever occurs first.

Additional engine oil and filter change

is indicated by the engine oil life

system, when required earlier than

maintenance.

A shorter service interval can be valid

for severe driving behaviour, e.g. for

taxis and police vehicles.

The European service intervals are

valid for the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia-

Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,

Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,

Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,

Greece, Greenland, Hungary,

Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,

Liechtenstein, Lithuania,

Luxembourg, North Macedonia,

Malta, Monaco, Montenegro,

Netherlands, Norway, Poland,

Portugal, Romania, San Marino,

Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain,

Sweden, Switzerland, United

Kingdom.

Service display 3 103.

International service intervals

Maintenance of your vehicle is

required every 10,000 miles or after

1 year, whichever occurs first, unless

otherwise indicated in the service

display.

Severe operating conditions exist if

one or more of the following

circumstances occur frequently: Cold

starting, stop and go operation, trailer

operation, mountain driving, driving

on poor and sandy road surfaces,

increased air pollution, presence of

Service and maintenance 277

airborne sand and high dust content,

driving at high altitude and large

variations of temperature. Under

these severe operating conditions,

certain service work may be required

more frequently than the regular

service interval.

The international service intervals are

valid for the countries which are not

listed in the European service

intervals.

Service display 3 103.

Confirmations

Confirmation of service is recorded in

the Service and Warranty Booklet.

The date and mileage is completed

with the stamp and signature of the

servicing workshop.

Make sure that the Service and

warranty booklet is completed

correctly as continuous proof of

service is essential if any warranty or

goodwill claims are to be met. It is also

a benefit when selling the vehicle.

Recommended fluids,

lubricants and parts

Recommended fluids and

lubricants

Only use products that meet the

recommended specifications.

9Warning

Operating materials are

hazardous and could be

poisonous. Handle with care. Pay

attention to information given on

the containers.

Engine oil

Engine oil is identified by its quality

and its viscosity. Quality is more

important than viscosity when

selecting which engine oil to use. The

oil quality ensures e.g. engine

cleanliness, wear protection and oil

aging control, whereas viscosity

grade gives information on the oil's

thickness over a temperature range.

Select the appropriate engine oil

based on its quality and on the

minimum ambient temperature

3 281.

Topping up engine oil

Caution

In case of any spilled oil, wipe it up

and dispose it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturers

and brands can be mixed as long as

they comply with the required engine

oil quality and viscosity.

Use of engine oils for all petrol

engines with only ACEA quality is

prohibited, since it can cause engine

damage under certain operating

conditions.

Select the appropriate engine oil

based on its quality and on the

minimum ambient temperature

3 281.

Additional engine oil additives

The use of additional engine oil

additives could cause damage and

invalidate the warranty.

278 Service and maintenance

Engine oil viscosity grades

The SAE viscosity grade gives

information on the thickness of the oil.

Multigrade oil is indicated by two

figures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The first

figure, followed by a W, indicates the

low temperature viscosity and the

second figure the high temperature

viscosity.

Select the appropriate viscosity grade

depending on the minimum ambient

temperature 3 281.

All of the recommended viscosity

grades are suitable for high ambient

temperatures.

Coolant and antifreeze

Use only organic acid type-long life

coolant (LLC) antifreeze approved for

the vehicle. Consult a workshop.

The system is factory filled with

coolant designed for excellent

corrosion protection and frost

protection down to approx. -28 °C. In

cold regions with very low

temperatures the factory filled coolant

provides frost protection down to

approx. -37 °C. This concentration

should be maintained all year round.

The use of additional coolant

additives that intend to give additional

corrosion protection or seal against

minor leaks can cause function

problems. Liability for consequences

resulting from the use of additional

coolant additives will be rejected.

Washer fluid

Use only washer fluid approved for

the vehicle to prevent damage of

wiper blades, paintwork, plastic and

rubber parts. Consult a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluid

Over time, brake fluid absorbs

moisture which will reduce braking

effectiveness. The brake fluid should

therefore be replaced at the specified

interval.

AdBlue

Only use AdBlue to reduce the

nitrogen oxides in the exhaust

emission 3 161.

Technical data 279

Technical data

Vehicle identification .................. 279

Vehicle identification number ..279

Identification plate ................... 279

Engine identification ................ 280

Vehicle data ............................... 281

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ................................ 281

Engine data ............................. 284

Performance ............................ 286

Vehicle dimensions ................. 289

Capacities ................................ 290

Tyre pressures ........................ 291

Towing hitch installation

dimensions ............................. 293

Vehicle identification

number

The vehicle identification number is

visible through the windscreen.

The vehicle identification number

may be stamped on the identification

plate and on the floor pan, under the

floor covering, visible under a cover,

or in the engine compartment on the

right body panel.

Identification plate

The identification label is located on

the front left or right door frame.

280 Technical data

Information on identification plate:

1: manufacturer

2: type approval number

3: vehicle identification number

4: permissible gross vehicle weight

rating in kg

5: permissible gross train weight in

6: maximum permissible front axle

load in kg

7: maximum permissible rear axle

load in kg

8: vehicle-specific or country-

specific data, e.g. MY = model

year

The combined total of front and rear

axle loads must not exceed the

permissible gross vehicle weight.

Vehicle's kerb weight depends on the

specification of the vehicle, e.g.

optional equipment and accessories.

Refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The technical data is determined in

accordance with European

Community standards. We reserve

the right to make modifications.

Specifications in the vehicle

documents always have priority over

those given in this manual.

Engine identification

The technical data tables use the

engine identifier code. The engine

data table additionally shows the

engineering code.

Engine data 3 284.

To identify the respective engine,

refer to the EEC Certificate of

Conformity provided with your vehicle

or other national registration

documents.

The Certificate of Conformity shows

the engine identifier code, other

national publications may show the

engineering code. Check piston

displacement and engine power to

identify the respective engine.

Technical data 281

Vehicle data

Recommended fluids and lubricants

European service schedule

Required engine oil quality

All countries with European service interval 3 276

Engine oil quality Petrol engines

D15XHL, D15XHT

Petrol engine

D16SHT

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ ✔ –

dexos2 – – ✔

OV0401547 ✔ – ✔

Diesel engines only: If the qualities mentioned above are unavailable, you may use max. 1 l engine oil quality ACEA C3

once between each engine oil change.

Petrol 1.5 engines only: If the qualities mentioned above are unavailable, you may use max. 1 l engine oil quality

ACEA A3/B3 once between each engine oil change.

282 Technical data

Engine oil viscosity grades

All countries with European service interval 3 276

Petrol engines

D15XHL, D15XHT

Petrol engine

D16SHT

Diesel engine

D16DTH

Diesel engines

D20DTH,D20DTR

Viscosity SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-201)

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-30

SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-40

1) only OV0401547

International service schedule

Required engine oil quality

All countries with international service interval 3 276

Engine oil quality Petrol engines

D15XHL, D15XHT

Petrol engine

D16SHT

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ ✔ –

dexos2 – – ✔

OV0401547 ✔ – ✔

Technical data 283

Engine oil viscosity grades

All countries with international service interval 3 276

Petrol engines

D15XHL, D15XHT

Petrol engine

D16SHT

Diesel engine

D16DTH

Diesel engines

D20DTH,D20DTR

Viscosity SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-201)

SAE 0W-30

SAE 5W-30

SAE 0W-30

SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-40

1) only OV0401547

In case of dexos or OV0401547 quality is unavailable you may use the engine oil ACEA A3/B3 or C3 for petrol engines

and ACEA A3/B4 or C3 for diesel engines.

284 Technical data

Engine data

Engine identifier code D15XHL D15XHT D16SHT

Sales designation 1.5T 1.5T 1.6T

Engineering code D15XHT D15XHT D16SHT

Piston displacement [cm3]1490 1490 1598

Engine power [kW] 103 121 147

at rpm 4000 5600 5500

Torque [Nm] 250 250 280

at rpm 2000-4000 2000-4500 1650-4500

Fuel type Petrol Petrol Petrol

Octane rating RON2)

recommended 95 95 95

possible 98 98 98

possible 91 91 91

Additional fuel type – – –

2) A country-specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine-specific requirement.

Technical data 285

Engine identifier code D16DTH D20DTH D20DTR

Sales designation 1.6 2.0 2.0

Engineering code D16DTH D20DTH D20DTR

Piston displacement [cm3]1598 1956 1956

Engine power [kW] 100 125 154

at rpm 3500-4000 3750 4000

Torque [Nm] 320 400 480

at rpm 2000-2250 1750-2500 1500

Fuel type Diesel Diesel Diesel

286 Technical data

Performance

Grand Sport

Engine D15XHL D15XHT D16SHT

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 130 138 146

Automatic transmission – 135 144

Engine D16DTH

D20DTH

FWD 3)

D20DTH

AWD4) D20DTR

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 131 140 139 –

Automatic transmission 127 139 – 145

3) Front wheel drive

4) All wheel drive

Technical data 287

Sports Tourer

Engine D15XHL D15XHT D16SHT

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 130 138 144

Automatic transmission – 135 143

Engine D16DTH

D20DTH

FWD 3)

D20DTH

AWD 4) D20DTR

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 129 139 137 –

Automatic transmission 125 137 – 143

3) Front wheel drive

4) All wheel drive

288 Technical data

Country Tourer

Engine D16SHT

D20DTH

FWD 3)

D20DTH

AWD 4) D20DTR

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission – 137 135 –

Automatic transmission 141 135 – 142

3) Front wheel drive

4) All wheel drive

Technical data 289

Vehicle dimensions

Grand Sport Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Length min.-max. [mm] 4897-4910 4986-50045)

Width with folded exterior mirrors [mm] 1941 1941

Width with unfolded exterior mirrors [mm] 2093 2093

Height (without antenna) [mm] 1425-1485 6) 1450-1550 6)

Vehicle height - Rear compartment open [mm] 2128 2065-2088 5)

Length of load compartment floor [mm] 1133 1178

Length of load compartment with folded rear seats [mm] 1937 2005

Load compartment width [mm] 1030 1030

Load compartment height [mm] 497 384

Wheelbase [mm] 2829 2829

Turning circle diameter [m] 11.75 11.75

5) Minimum length for standard version, maximum length for Country Tourer version.

6) Depending on body- and equipment variants.

290 Technical data

Capacities

Engine oil

Engine D15XHL D15XHT D16SHT

including filter [l] 4.0 4.0 5.5

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0

Engine D16DTI D16DTH D20DTH D20DTR

including filter [l] 5.0 5.0 4.9 4.9

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Fuel tank

Petrol/diesel, refilling quantity [l] 61

AdBlue tank

AdBlue, refilling quantity [l] 17

Technical data 291

Tyre pressures

Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]

([psi]) [kPa/bar]

([psi])

D15XHL,

D15XHT,

D16DTH

215/55 R17 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 280/2.8 (41) 300/3.0 (44)

225/55 R17,

235/45 R18,

245/45 R18,

245/35 R20

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

D16SHT 235/45 R18,

245/45 R18,

245/35 R20,

235/50 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

D20DTH 225/55 R17 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 280/2.8 (41) 300/3.0 (44)

245/45 R18 220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

235/45 R18,

245/35 R20

235/50 R18

240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

292 Technical data

Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]

([psi]) [kPa/bar]

([psi])

D20DTR 245/35 R18 240/2.4 (35) 220/2.2 (32) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 290/2.9 (42)

All Temporary spare wheel

125/80 R16,

125/70 R17

420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60) – – 420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60)

Technical data 293

Towing hitch installation dimensions

Grand Sport

294 Technical data

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Customer information 295

Customer

information

Customer information ................ 295

Declaration of conformity ......... 295

REACH .................................... 299

Collision damage repair ........... 299

Software acknowledgement .... 299

Software update ...................... 301

Registered trademarks ............ 301

Vehicle data recording and pri‐

vacy ........................................... 302

Event data recorders ............... 302

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID) ..................................... 305

Customer information

Declaration of conformity

Radio transmission systems

This vehicle has systems that

transmit and / or receive radio waves

subject to Directive 2014/53/EU. The

manufacturers of the systems listed

below declare conformity with

Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of

the EU declaration of conformity for

each system is available at the

following internet address:

www.opel.com/conformity.

Importer is

Opel / Vauxhall, Bahnhofsplatz,

65423 Ruesselsheim am Main,

Germany.

Antenna

Laird

Daimlerring 31, 31135 Hildesheim,

Germany

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Antenna

Kathrein Automotive GmbH

Roemerring 1, 31137 Hildesheim,

Germany

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Electronic key receiver

Denso Corporation

Waldeckerstaße 11, 64546

Mörfelden-Walldorf, Germany

Operation frequency: 125 kHz

Maximum output: -0.14 dBm

Electronic key transmitter

Denso Corporation

1-1, Showa-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-

ken 448-8661, Japan

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: -5.88 dBm

Immobiliser

Robert Bosch GmbH

Robert Bosch Platz 1, 70839

Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: 125 kHz

296 Customer information

Maximum output:

5.1 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Infotainment system Multimedia

LG Electronics

European Shared Service Center

B.V., Krijgsman 1, 1186 DM

Amstelveen, The Netherlands

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5 8

2400.0 - 2483.5 16

5725.0 - 5875.0 9

Infotainment system Multimedia Navi

Electronics European Shared Service

Center B.V., Krijgsman 1, 1186 DM

Amstelveen, The Netherlands

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2402.0 - 2480.0 4

2400.0 - 2483.5 13

5725.0 - 5850.0 13

Infotainment system

Multimedia Navi Pro

Harman International Industries

Becker-Goering-Str. 16, 76307

Karlsbad, Germany

Operation

frequency (MHz) Maximum output

(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5 9

2400.0 - 2483.5 19

5725.0 - 5875.0 13.9

Parking heater remote control

receiver

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205

Gilching, Germany

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote control

transmitter

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205

Gilching, Germany

Operation frequency: 869.0 MHz

Maximum output: 14 dBm

Radar unit

Continental Automotive GmbH

ADC Automotive Distance Control

Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-

Strasse 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany

Operation frequency: 76-77 Ghz

Maximum output: 35 EIRP dBm

Radar unit

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co.

Rixbecker Straße 75, 59552

Lippstadt

Operation frequency:

24.05-24.25 Ghz

Maximum output: 20 EIRP dBm

Radio remote control transmitter

Robert Bosch GmbH

Customer information 297

Robert Bosch Platz 1, 70839

Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: -4 dBm

Radio remote control receiver

Robert Bosch GmbH

Robert Bosch Platz 1, 70839

Gerlingen, Germany

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Tyre pressure sensors

Schrader Electronics Ltd.

11 Technology Park, Belfast Road,

Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland,

United Kingdom

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: 10 dBm

298 Customer information

Jack

Customer information 299

REACH

Registration, Evaluation,

Authorisation and Restriction of

Chemicals (REACH) is a European

Union regulation adopted to improve

the protection of human health and

the environment from the risks that

can be posed by chemicals. Visit

www.opel.com/reach for further

information and for access to the

Article 33 communication.

Collision damage repair

Vauxhall Exclusive paint

Notice

Differing from standard vehicle

paints, paint thickness may vary

over the whole body due to manual

paint operation.

A colour code label with information

about the individual paint formula is

placed in the spare wheel well.

Software acknowledgement

Certain Emergency call components

include libcurl and unzip software and

other third party software. Below are

the notices and licenses associated

with libcurl and unzip and for other

third party software please see http://

www.lg.com/global/support/

opensource/index.

libcurl

Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and

distribute this software for any

purpose with or without fee is hereby

granted, provided that the above

notice appear in all copies.

The software is provided "as is",

without warranty of any kind, express

or implied, including but not limited to

the warranties of merchantability,

fitness for a particular purpose and

noninfringement of third party rights.

In no event shall the authors or

claim, damages or other liability,

whether in an action of contract, tort

or otherwise, arising from, out of or in

connection with the software or the

use or other dealings in the software.

Except as contained in this notice, the

name of a copyright holder shall not

be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other

dealings in this Software without prior

written authorization of the copyright

holder.

300 Customer information

unzip

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the

Info-ZIP copyright and license. The

definitive version of this document

should be available at ftp://ftp.info-

zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html

indefinitely.

rights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright and

license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the

following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,

Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,

Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed

Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,

Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert

Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul

Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny

Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor

Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio

Monesi, Keith Owens, George

Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe

Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave

Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian

Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine

Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich

Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”

without warranty of any kind, express

or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP

or its contributors be held liable for

any direct, indirect, incidental, special

or consequential damages arising out

of the use of or inability to use this

software.

Permission is granted to anyone to

use this software for any purpose,

including commercial applications,

and to alter it and redistribute it freely,

subject to the following restrictions:

1. Redistributions of source code

must retain the above copyright

notice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form

(compiled executables) must

reproduce the above copyright

notice, definition, disclaimer, and

this list of conditions in

documentation and/or other

materials provided with the

distribution. The sole exception to

this condition is redistribution of a

standard UnZipSFX binary

(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that is

permitted without inclusion of this

license, as long as the normal

SFX banner has not been

removed from the binary or

disabled.

3. Altered versions--including, but

not limited to, ports to new

operating systems, existing ports

with new graphical interfaces, and

dynamic, shared, or static library

versions--must be plainly marked

as such and must not be

misrepresented as being the

original source. Such altered

versions also must not be

misrepresented as being Info-ZIP

releases--including, but not

limited to, labeling of the altered

versions with the names “Info-

ZIP” (or any variation thereof,

including, but not limited to,

different capitalizations), “Pocket

UnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” without

the explicit permission of Info-ZIP.

Such altered versions are further

prohibited from misrepresentative

Customer information 301

use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-

mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP

URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use

the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”

“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”

“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and

“MacZip” for its own source and

binary releases.

Software update

The Infotainment system can

download and install selected

software updates over a wireless

connection.

Notice

The availability of these over-the-air

vehicle software updates varies by

vehicle and country. Find more

information on our home page.

Internet connection

Downloading over-the-air vehicle

software updates requires internet

connectivity, which can be accessed

through a password-protected Wi-Fi

hotspot, e.g. provided by a mobile

phone.

To connect the Infotainment system

to a hotspot, select Settings on the

home screen, Wi-Fi and then Manage

Wi-Fi Networks. Select the desired

Wi-Fi network, and follow the on-

screen prompts.

Updates

The system will prompt for certain

updates to be downloaded and

installed. There is also an option to

check for updates manually.

To manually check for updates, select

Settings on the home screen,

Software Information and then

System Update. Follow the on-screen

prompts.

Notice

Steps for downloading and installing

updates may vary by vehicle.

Notice

During the installation process, the

vehicle may not be operational.

Registered trademarks

Apple Inc.

Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of

Apple Inc.

App Store® and iTunes Store® are

registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPod

nano®, iPad® and Siri® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark

of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DivX, LLC

DivX® and DivX Certified® are

registered trademarks of DivX, LLC.

EnGIS Technologies, Inc.

BringGo® is a registered trademark of

EnGIS Technologies, Inc.

Google Inc.

Android™ and Google Play™ Store

are trademarks of Google Inc.

Stitcher Inc.

Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,

Inc.

Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.

AdBlue® is a registered trademark of

the VDA.

302 Customer information

Vehicle data recording

and privacy

Event data recorders

Electronic control units are installed in

your vehicle. Control units process

data which is received by vehicle

sensors, for example, or which they

generate themselves or exchange

amongst themselves. Some control

units are necessary for the safe

functioning of your vehicle, others

assist you while you drive (driver

assistance systems), while others

provide comfort or infotainment

functions.

The following contains general

information about data processing in

the vehicle. You will find additional

information as to which specific data

is uploaded, stored and passed on to

third parties and for what purpose in

your vehicle under the key word Data

Protection closely linked to the

references for the affected functional

characteristics in the relevant owner's

manual or in the general terms of

sale. These are also available online.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data for

operation of the vehicle.

This data includes, e.g.:

● vehicle status information (e.g.

speed, movement delay, lateral

acceleration, wheel rotation rate,

"seat belts fastened" display)

● ambient conditions (e.g.

temperature, rain sensor,

distance sensor)

As a rule such data is transient, not

stored for longer than an operational

cycle, and only processed on board

the vehicle itself. Control units often

include data storage (including the

vehicle key). This is used to allow

information to be documented

temporarily or permanently on vehicle

condition, component stress,

maintenance requirements and

technical events and errors.

Depending on technical equipment

level, the data stored is as follows:

● system component operating

states (e.g. fill level, tyre

pressure, battery status)

● faults and defects in important

system components (e.g. lights,

brakes)

● system reactions in special

driving situations (e.g. triggering

of an airbag, actuation of the

stability control systems)

● information on events damaging

the vehicle

● for electric vehicles the amount of

charge in the high-voltage

battery, estimated range

In special cases (e.g. if the vehicle

has detected a malfunction), it may be

necessary to save data that would

otherwise just be volatile.

When you use services (e.g. repairs,

maintenance), the operating data

saved can be read together with the

vehicle identification number and

used when necessary. Staff working

for the service network (e.g. garages,

manufacturers) or third parties (e.g.

Customer information 303

breakdown services) can read the

data from the vehicle. The same

applies to warranty work and quality

assurance measures.

Data is generally read via the OBD

(On-Board Diagnostics) port

prescribed by law in the vehicle. The

operating data which is read out,

documents the technical condition of

the vehicle or individual components

and assists with fault diagnosis,

compliance with warranty obligations

and quality improvement. This data,

in particular information on

component stress, technical events,

operator errors and other faults, is

transmitted to the manufacturer

where appropriate, together with the

vehicle identification number. The

manufacturer is also subject to

product liability. The manufacturer

potentially also uses operating data

from vehicles for product recalls. This

data can also be used to check

customer warranty and guarantee

claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be

reset by a service company when

carrying out servicing or repairs or at

your request.

Comfort and infotainment

functions

Comfort settings and custom settings

can be stored in the vehicle and

changed or reset at any time.

Depending on the equipment level in

question, these include

● seat and steering wheel position

settings

● chassis and air conditioning

settings

● custom settings such as interior

lighting

You can input your own data in the

infotainment functions for your

vehicle as part of the selected

features.

Depending on the equipment level in

question, these include

● multimedia data such as music,

videos or photos for playback in

an integrated multimedia system

● address book data for use with an

integrated hands-free system or

an integrated navigation system

● input destinations

● data on the use of online services

This data for comfort and

infotainment functions can be stored

locally in the vehicle or be kept on a

device that you have connected to the

vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB stick

or MP3 player). Data that you have

input yourself can be deleted at any

time.

This data can only be transmitted out

of the vehicle at your request,

particularly when using online

services in accordance with the

settings selected by you.

Smartphone integration, e.g.

Android Auto or Apple CarPlay

If your vehicle is equipped

accordingly, you can connect your

smartphone or another mobile device

to the vehicle so that you can control

it via the controls integrated in the

vehicle. The smartphone image and

sound can be output via the

multimedia system in this case. At the

same time, specific information is

transmitted to your smartphone.

Depending on the type of integration,

304 Customer information

this includes data such as position

data, day / night mode and other

general vehicle information. For more

information, please see the operating

instructions for the vehicle /

infotainment system.

Integration allows selected

smartphone apps to be used, such as

navigation or music playback. No

further integration is possible

between smartphone and vehicle, in

particular active access to vehicle

data. The nature of further data

processing is determined by the

provider of the app used. Whether

you can define settings, and if so

which ones, is dependent on the app

in question and your smartphone's

operating system.

Online services

If your vehicle has a radio network

connection, this allows data to be

exchanged between your vehicle and

other systems. The radio network

connection is made possible by

means of a transmitter device in your

vehicle or a mobile device provided

by you (e.g. a smartphone). Online

functions can be used via this radio

network connection. These include

online services and applications /

apps provided to you by the

manufacturer or other providers.

Proprietary services

In the case of the manufacturer's

online services, the relevant functions

are described by the manufacturer in

an appropriate location (e.g. Owner's

Manual, the manufacturer's website)

and the associated data protection

information is provided. Personal

data may be used to provide online

services. Data exchange for this

purpose takes place via a protected

connection, e.g. using the

manufacturer's IT systems provided

for the purpose. Collection,

processing and use of personal data

for the purposes of preparation of

services take place solely on the

basis of legal permission, e.g. in the

case of a legally prescribed

emergency communication system or

a contractual agreement, or by virtue

of consent.

You can activate or deactivate the

services and functions (which are

subject to charges to some extent)

and, in some cases, the vehicle's

entire radio network connection. This

does not include statutory functions

and services such as an emergency

communication system.

Third party services

If you make use of online services

from other providers (third parties),

these services are subject to the

liability and data protection and usage

conditions of the provider in question.

The manufacturer frequently has no

influence over the content exchanged

in this regard.

Customer information 305

Therefore, please note the nature,

scope and purpose of the collection

and use of personal data within the

scope of third party services provided

by the service provider in question.

Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID)

RFID technology is used in some

vehicles for functions such as tyre

pressure monitoring and immobiliser.

It is also used in connection with

conveniences such as radio remote

controls for door locking / unlocking

and starting. RFID technology in

Vauxhall vehicles does not use or

record personal information or link

with any other Vauxhall system

containing personal information.

306

Index A

Accessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 228

Active bonnet................................ 71

Active emergency braking.......... 193

Adaptive cruise control....... 109, 180

AdBlue................................ 108, 161

Adjustable air vents ................... 148

Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 105

Airbag deactivation .............. 63, 105

Airbag label................................... 58

Airbag system .............................. 58

Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 149

Air conditioning system .............. 139

Air intake .................................... 149

Air vents...................................... 148

All-wheel drive ........................... 169

Antilock brake system ................ 169

Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 106

Anti-theft alarm system ................ 34

Anti-theft locking system .............. 34

Appearance care........................ 272

Armrest................................... 53, 55

Armrest storage ........................... 74

Ashtrays ....................................... 95

Automatic anti-dazzle .................. 40

Automatic dimming ...................... 39

Automatic light control ............... 129

Automatic locking ........................ 28

Automatic transmission ............. 164

Autostop..................................... 156

Auxiliary heater........................... 148

Baselevel display........................ 110

Battery discharge protection ...... 138

Belts.............................................. 56

BlueInjection............................... 161

Bonnet ....................................... 230

Brake and clutch fluid................. 277

Brake and clutch system ........... 106

Brake assist ............................... 172

Brake fluid .................................. 233

Brakes ............................... 169, 233

Breakdown.................................. 270

Bulb replacement ....................... 237

Capacities .................................. 290

Cargo management system ........ 80

Catalytic converter ..................... 161

Central locking system ................ 25

Centre console lighting .............. 137

Centre console storage ............... 74

Changing tyre and wheel size ...258

Charging system ........................ 105

Child locks ................................... 29

Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 67

Child restraints.............................. 64

307

Child restraint systems ................ 64

Climate control ............................. 15

Clock............................................. 92

Collision damage repair.............. 299

Control indicators........................ 104

Control of the vehicle ................. 151

Controls........................................ 88

Convex shape .............................. 37

Coolant and antifreeze............... 277

Cruise control .................... 109, 177

Cupholders .................................. 73

Curtain airbag system .................. 62

Curve lighting.............................. 132

Danger, Warnings and Cautions ...4

Daytime running lights ............... 132

Declaration of conformity............ 295

DEF............................................ 161

Diesel exhaust fluid.................... 161

Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 236

Door open .................................. 110

Doors............................................ 29

Driver assistance systems.......... 177

Driver Information Centre........... 110

Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 224

Driving hints................................ 151

Electric adjustment ...................... 37

Electrical system......................... 247

Electric parking brake......... 106, 170

Electric parking brake fault......... 106

Electronic climate control system 142

Electronic driving programmes ..166

Electronic key system................... 22

Electronic Stability Control.......... 174

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system.......... 107

Electronic Stability Control off..... 107

Emergency call........................... 126

End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 229

Engine compartment fuse box ... 248

Engine coolant ........................... 232

Engine coolant temperature ...... 107

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 102

Engine data ............................... 284

Engine exhaust .......................... 159

Engine identification................... 280

Engine oil ................... 231, 277, 281

Engine oil pressure .................... 108

Entry lighting .............................. 137

Event data recorders.................. 302

Exhaust filter............................... 159

Exit lighting ................................ 137

Exterior care .............................. 272

Exterior light ............................... 109

Exterior lighting .................... 12, 128

Exterior mirrors............................. 37

Fault ........................................... 167

First aid kit ................................... 84

Fixed air vents ........................... 149

Floor mats................................... 275

Folding mirrors ............................. 38

Following distance...................... 107

Following distance indication...... 192

Forward collision alert................. 189

Front airbag system ..................... 61

Front fog lights ........... 109, 134, 239

Front pedestrian protection........ 196

Front seats.................................... 47

Front storage................................ 74

Fuel............................................. 220

Fuel for diesel engines .............. 221

Fuel for petrol engines ............... 220

Fuel gauge ................................. 102

Funnel......................................... 222

Fuses ......................................... 247

Gauges....................................... 100

Gear selection ........................... 164

Gear shifting............................... 107

General information ................... 224

Glovebox ..................................... 73

308

Halogen headlights .................... 237

Hand brake................................. 169

Hazard warning flashers ............ 133

Headlight flash ........................... 131

Headlight range adjustment ...... 131

Headlights................................... 128

Headlights when driving abroad 131

Head restraint adjustment ............. 8

Head restraints ............................ 45

Head-up display.......................... 117

Heated mirrors ............................. 39

Heated rear window ..................... 42

Heated steering wheel ................. 88

Heated windscreen....................... 43

Heating .................................. 54, 55

High beam ......................... 109, 129

High beam assist................ 109, 129

Hill start assist ........................... 172

Horn ....................................... 13, 89

Identification plate ..................... 279

Ignition switch positions ............. 151

Immobiliser .......................... 37, 109

Indicators.................................... 100

Inductive charging........................ 94

Info Display................................. 116

Instrument cluster ........................ 96

Instrument panel fuse box ......... 251

Instrument panel illumination

control .................................... 135

Instrument panel overview ........... 10

Interactive driving system........... 175

Interior care ............................... 274

Interior lighting............................ 135

Interior lights ...................... 136, 247

Interior mirrors.............................. 39

Interruption of power supply ...... 167

Introduction .................................... 3

Jump starting ............................. 268

Key, memorised settings.............. 25

Keys ............................................. 20

Keys, locks................................... 20

Lane change alert....................... 206

Lane keep assist................ 107, 217

Lashing eyes ............................... 80

LED headlights........... 109, 132, 239

Lighting features......................... 137

Light switch ................................ 128

Load compartment ................ 29, 75

Load compartment cover ............. 78

Loading information ..................... 85

Low fuel ..................................... 108

Malfunction indicator light .......... 105

Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 39

Manual mode ............................. 165

Manual seat adjustment............... 48

Manual transmission .................. 168

Massage....................................... 55

Memorised settings...................... 25

Mirror adjustment ........................... 8

Misted light covers ..................... 135

New vehicle running-in .............. 151

Number plate light ..................... 247

Object detection systems........... 198

Odometer ................................... 101

Oil, engine.......................... 277, 281

Outside temperature .................... 92

Overrun cut-off ........................... 156

Panoramic view system.............. 208

Parking ................................ 18, 158

Parking assist ...................... 39, 198

Parking brake ............................ 170

Parking lights ............................. 135

Particulate filter........................... 159

Pedestrian detection................... 110

Performance .............................. 286

309

Performing work ........................ 230

Power button.............................. 152

Power outlets ............................... 93

Power seat adjustment ................ 50

Power windows ............................ 40

Preheating ................................. 108

Puncture..................................... 264

Quickheat................................... 148

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID)..................................... 305

Radio remote control ................... 21

REACH....................................... 299

Reading lights ............................ 136

Rear cross traffic alert................ 212

Rear floor storage cover .............. 80

Rear fog light ............. 109, 134, 241

Rear seats.................................... 55

Rear storage................................. 78

Rear view camera ...................... 210

Rear window wiper and washer ..91

Recommended fluids and

lubricants ........................ 277, 281

Refuelling ................................... 222

Registered trademarks............... 301

Retained power off..................... 154

Reversing lights ......................... 135

Ride control systems.................. 173

Roof.............................................. 43

Roof load...................................... 85

Roof rack ..................................... 85

Safety belts................................... 56

Safety net .................................... 81

Seat adjustment ............................. 6

Seat belt ........................................ 8

Seat belt reminder ..................... 104

Seat belts ..................................... 56

Seat heating

Seat heating, front..................... 54

Seat heating, rear..................... 55

Seat position ................................ 47

Selective catalytic reduction....... 161

Selector lever.............................. 164

Service ............................... 149, 276

Service display .......................... 103

Service information .................... 276

Side airbag system ...................... 62

Side blind spot alert.................... 205

Sidelights.................................... 128

Side turn lights ........................... 246

Software acknowledgement....... 299

Software update......................... 301

Spare wheel ............................... 264

Speed limiter....................... 110, 179

Speedometer ............................. 100

Starting and operating................ 151

Starting off ................................... 17

Starting the engine .................... 154

Steering...................................... 151

Steering wheel adjustment ...... 9, 88

Steering wheel controls ............... 88

Stop-start system........................ 156

Storage......................................... 73

Storage compartments................. 73

Sunglasses storage ..................... 74

Sunroof ........................................ 43

Sunvisor lights ........................... 137

Sun visors .................................... 43

Symbols ......................................... 4

Tachometer ............................... 102

Tail lights ................................... 241

Three-point seat belt .................... 57

Tools .......................................... 252

Tow bar....................................... 224

Towing................................ 224, 270

Towing another vehicle ............. 271

Towing equipment ..................... 225

Towing hitch installation

dimensions ............................. 293

Towing the vehicle ..................... 270

Traction Control system ............. 173

Traction Control system off......... 107

Traffic sign assistant........... 110, 213

Trailer coupling........................... 224

310

Trailer stability assist ................. 227

Trailer towing ............................. 224

Transmission ............................... 16

Transmission display ................. 164

Tread depth ............................... 257

Trip odometer ............................ 101

Turn lights .......................... 104, 134

Tyre chains ................................ 259

Tyre designations ...................... 254

Tyre pressure ............................ 254

Tyre pressure monitoring

system............................. 108, 255

Tyre pressures ........................... 291

Tyre repair kit ............................. 259

Upholstery.................................. 274

Uplevel display........................... 110

USB port....................................... 93

Using this manual .......................... 3

Valet mode................................. 116

Vehicle battery ........................... 234

Vehicle checks............................ 230

Vehicle data................................ 281

Vehicle data recording and

privacy..................................... 302

Vehicle detected ahead.............. 110

Vehicle dimensions .................... 289

Vehicle identification number ....279

Vehicle jack................................ 252

Vehicle messages ..................... 121

Vehicle personalisation ............. 122

Vehicle security............................ 34

Vehicle specific data ...................... 3

Vehicle storage........................... 229

Vehicle tools............................... 252

Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6

Ventilating..................................... 54

Warning chimes ......................... 121

Warning lights............................. 100

Warning triangle .......................... 83

Washer and wiper systems ......... 13

Washer fluid ............................... 233

Wheel changing ......................... 264

Wheel covers ............................. 258

Wheels and tyres ....................... 253

Windows....................................... 40

Windscreen................................... 40

Windscreen wiper and washer .... 89

Winter tyres ............................... 253

Wiper blade replacement .......... 236

The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. Vauxhall Motors Ltd. reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications,

features and design of the vehicles relative to the information contained in this publication, as well as changes to the publication itself.

Edition: August 2019, Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

*ID-VINBORIE1908-EN*

ID-VINBORIE1908-en

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Vauxhall Insignia 2019 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 9.77 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Vauxhall Insignia 2019 Manual

Product: